Home

WinView/32 Software User`s Manual

1. WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 DelayTime 46 Used with Async Mode ShutterControl 50 Normal Disabled Open Disabled Closed AbsorbLive 52 On Off AbsorbMode 54 Reference Strip or File CanDoVirtualChipFlag 56 T F Cont Chip able to do Virtual Chip ThresholdMinLive 58 On Off ThresholdMinVal 60 Threshold Minimum Value ThresholdMaxLive 64 On Off ThresholdMaxVal 66 Threshold Maximum Value SpecAutoSpectroMode 70 T F Spectrograph Used SpecCenterw1lNm 72 Center Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueFlag 76 T F File is Glued SpecGlueStartW1lNm 78 Starting Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueEndw1Nm 82 Starting Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueMinOvri1pNm 86 Minimum Overlap in Nm SpecGlueFinalResNm 90 Final Resolution in Nm PulserType 94 O None PG200 1 PTG 2 DG535 3 CustomChipFlag 96 T F Custom Chip Used XPrePixels 98 Pre Pixels in X direction XPostPixels 100 Post Pixels in X direction YPrePixels 102 Pre Pixels in Y direction YPostPixels 104 Post Pixels in Y direction asynen 106 asynchron enable flag 0 off datatype 108 experiment datatype 0 float 4 bytes 1 long 4 bytes 2 short 2 bytes 3 unsigned short 2 bytes PulserMode 110 Repetitive Sequential PulserOnChipAccums 112 Num PTG On Chip Accums PulserRepeatExp 114 Num Exp Repeats Pulser SW Accum PulseRepWidth 118 Width Value for Repetitive pulse usec PulseRepDelay 122 Width Value for Repetitive pulse usec PulseSeqStartWidth 126 Start Width
2. 3000 offset for absolute data scaling 3008 factor for absolute data scaling 3016 selected scaling unit 3017 reserved 3018 special string for scaling 3058 reserved 3098 flag if calibration is valid 3099 current input units for calib value 3100 linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff 3101 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM 3102 valid calibration data pairs 3103 pixel pos of calibration data 3183 calibration VALUE at above pos 3263 polynom COEFFICIENTS 3311 laser wavenumber for relativ WN 3319 reserved 3320 If set to 200 valid label below 3321 Calibration label NULL term d 3402 Calibration Expansion area xy 27 wf hs aye xf ats A aY xy oy X7 AY E xy ahs x Appendix B Data Structure Start of Y Calibration Structure double double char char char char char char cnar char char double double double double char offset factor current_unit reservedl string 40 reserved2 40 calib valid input_unit polynom unit polynom order calib_count pixel_position 10 calib_value 10 polynom_coeff 6 laser_position reserved3 unsigned char new_calib_flag char char calib_label 81 expansion 87 3489 3497 3505 3506 3507 3547 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3672 3752
3. jE right x value amount x is binned grouped in hw top y start value bottom y value amount y is binned grouped in hw ROI Starting Offsets ROI 1 1512 ROI 2 1524 ROI 3 1536 ROI 4 1548 ROI 5 1560 ROI 6 1572 ROI 7 1584 ROI 8 1596 ROI 9 1608 ROI 10 1620 1632 Flat field file name 1752 Background sub 1872 file name Blemish file name 1992 Software version 1996 2995 user data 2996 Set to 0x01234567L if file was created by Winx Version 2 5 27 A ae wr aA Rh bie ef we Z Si af xy y ee ef ay ff ep bar ad ae xy A Ry ay ny Calibration Structures There are three structures for the calibrations e The Area Inside the Calibration Structure below is repeated two times xcalibration ycalibration 3000 3488 x axis calibration 3489 3977 y axis calibration Start of X Calibration Structure double double char char char char char char cnar char char double double double double char unsigned char char char offset factor current_unit reserved string 40 reserved2 40 calib valid input_unit polynom_unit polynom order calib_count pixel_position 10 calib_value 10 polynom_coeff 6 laser_position reserved3 new_calib_flag calib_label 81 expansion 87
4. r a Cross Sections T Auto Select M Horizontal M Horizontal a M Vertical V Vettical Image C Graph C Info Bar Tool Bar Carag IT Keen Window Placement Figure 63 Display Layout dialog box Cross Sections both boxes checked Keep Window Placement unchecked 72 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Range tab page Initial Autoscale checked Set to Full Range checked Frame Color tab page no changes Axes tab page Horizontal axis checked Horizontal label checked Horizontal label string Pixel Vertical axis checked Vertical label checked Vertical label string Intensity 3D Layout 3D Mode Multi strip same frame selected 3D Properties Remove Hidden Line checked other two boxes unchecked Z Axis Endpoint X set to 20 Y set to 40 3D Marker curves Marker Curves unchecked Curve set to 5 6 Click on OK The Display Layout dialog box will close and the data display exclusive of the intensity profiles should appear as shown in Figure 64 Each strip is displayed as a plot of intensity vs pixel number The first strip is at the front and the last strip is at the back Initially the cursor will be at the lower left Use the up arrow key to move to a higher numbered strip and the right arrow key to move to a higher numbered pixel on the strip Then click the Intensity Autoscale key to scale the intensity profiles Note that clicking the mouse button at different points on the display will change the p
5. As eA fe fo A Lees fed 622 638 654 656 658 660 664 668 672 688 704 706 3 UNSIGNED INTEGER calibration nanometer set to 1 if background sub done min of strips per skips of min blocks before geo skps calibration coefficients ADC rate ADC type ADC resolution ADC bit adjust gain experiment remarks geometric operations rotate 0x01 reverse 0x02 flip 0x04 Intensity display string cleans number of skips per clean calibration file name CSMA background file name number of source comp diodes y dimension of raw data 0 scrambled 1 unscrambled long exposure in milliseconds used if exposure set to 1 long num of scans used if noscan set to 1 long num of accumulations used if avgexp set to 1 stripe file st130 version amp date 01 000 02 01 90 1 newl20 Type IT 2 01d120 Type I 3 ST130 4 ST121 5 ST138 6 DC131 PentaMAX 7 ST133 MicroMAX SpectroMax 8 ST135 GPIB 9 VICCD 10 ST116 GPIB 11 OMA3 GPIB 12 OMA4 Set to 1 if flat field was applied reserved Kinetics Trigger Mode EMPTY BLOCK FOR EXPANSION Vert Clock Speed in micro sec set to 1 if accum done by Hardware set to 1 if store sync used set to 1 if blemish removal applied set to 1 if cosmic ray removal done if cosmic ray applied this is type Threshold of cosmic ray removal number of frames in file max intensity of
6. WinView PRINGETON INSTRUMENTS Imaging Software 4411 0046 Version 2 51 June 4 2007 Princeton Inst t WLP NCTON IMITATE Copyright 2001 2007 Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc 3660 Quakerbridge Rd Trenton NJ 08619 TEL 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 FAX 609 587 1970 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without the written permission of Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Princeton Instruments Printed in the United States of America Adobe Acrobat Photoshop and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Cascade is a registered trademark of Roper Scientific Inc InSpectrum is a trademark of Acton Research Corporation Jasc and Paint Shop Pro are registered trademarks of Jasc Software Inc PVCAM is a registered trademark of Photometrics Ltd Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The information in this publication is believed to be accurate as of the publication release date However Princeton Instruments does not assume any responsibility for any consequences including any damages resulting from the use thereof The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revision of this publication may be issued to incorporate such change Table of Contents P
7. ecceeseeseeseeeteeneeeneeenes 144 Files of Type text boxie sinin terasta 56 Filter Matrix custom filter 0 cc ccececseeseesteeteeees 118 BITS Converters cce csscceyhes nist aE a a eie 154 Fixed Increment type ccceeceeesceseceseeeteeseeeneeenes 144 Flatfield Corrections ccceesceeseeeeeeseeeseeeeenseenes 103 acquiring a flatfield file tee eeeeteeneeeeenee 103 AULOTMATIC 25a Seiiseas EE cose cstetsaaes 103 FT IMAGE SHIFT signal cccccecescesecseeeeeseeeees 39 Full lateral resolution ccceeceeeeeseeeteeseeeneeenes 201 G H Gate Delay sc53 05 coh n a 144 Gate Width aeiiao neea ea acter ee has 144 GPIB default address setting ceceseeseeseenee 140 Graphics Cat acierta 18 Graphs labeling mierenie eee 66 GrOUPING cess ae See neat an 96 Hard disk RE E 17 Hardware setup Camera Detection Wizard ccceeseeseeseeeeeees 29 Custom Chis gre 522 2 yeseat feed ed esetesntede tiiis 153 Index Hardware setup cont Custom Timing eecceecceeceessecsseeseeeseeeeeeseeeereees 154 Display tab page scoters 40 Hardware Setup Wizard ccceceeseeseeeeeteeeees 33 Interface tab page ccceccsseesessceeseeeeeeeeeeseeneees 41 OVEIVIEW i015 iret onanii enai anla 21 t qurements esnie e E 17 Hid lamp speisen nnn a 71 High speed PCI interface ceccccsseesseereeseeereees 41 Histograms CUMUATIVE senner ss 128 POSt PIOCOSSING ee eeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeet
8. Not used by WinView i 90 char fastfile 16 fast access file Not used by WinView 106 int asynen Not used by WinView 7 108 int datatype 0 gt float 4 byte KJ 1 gt long integer 4 byte F 2 gt integer 2 byte FJ 3 gt unsigned integer 2 byte A 4 gt String char 1 byte ij 5 gt double 8 bytes Not implemented 6 gt byte 1 byte Ef 7 gt unsigned byte 1 byte E 110 float calibnan 10 Not used by WinView if 150 int rtanum Not used by WinView 152 int astdiode Not used by WinView E 154 int int78 Not used by WinView x7 156 int int79 Not used by WinView 158 double calibpol 4 Not used by WinView a 190 int int96 Not used by WinView a 192 int int97 Not used by WinView A 194 int int98 Not used by WinView EJ 196 int int99 Not used by WinView 198 int int100 Not used by WinView eh 200 char exprem 5 80 comments xJ 600 int int301 Not used by WinView 7 602 char label 16 Not used by WinView E 618 int gsize Not used by WinView a7 620 int lfloat Not used by WinView 622 char califile 16 calibration file Not used by WinView 638 char bkgdfile 16 background file Not used by WinView 654 int srcecmp Not used by WinView 171 172 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 656 int stripe number of stripes per frame 27 658 int scrambl
9. Note The directory can be changed by changing the selection in the Look In box The next time the Open dialog box is opened the new folder name will appear in the box and its contents will be shown 2 Ifthe Auto Select check box is checked deselect it Then select Image 3 From the data directory select the ra CIRCUIT SEE 28 i248 image file called CIRCUIT SPE s Click on the OK button A window of the appropriate dimensions should appear immediately The image display Figure 47 may take a few seconds depending on the speed of the computer Figure 47 Circuit spe Image 64 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Changing the Brightness Range 1 2 Click on Ed 5 95 located beneath the displayed image as shown in Figure 47 You will observe a moderate brightening of the image as it autoscales on the central 90 of the image histogram The brightest pixels with high dark charge and the darkest pixels pixels with low response are ignored Click on the Autoscale button restoring the image to its initial appearance Brightness Contrast Control Select Palette on the Display menu This Brightness Contrast x will open the Brightness Contrast dialog i T eee ife a OANT box Figure 48 Note that the window aa hae thes includes a plot of display brightness Y Bont schema a pomami tog Clod axis versus data value X axis As Te 2 Square settings are changed the displayed curve 245 C Histogra
10. PPE a New ROI and Intensity Range Open the Range tab page Note that you can change the displayed intensity range as well as the X Y range Try entering more restricted ranges and note how the displayed image changes Changing the X Y range by entering new values is functionally equivalent to changing the displayed area by dragging the cursor as previously described Selecting a narrower intensity range results in pixels brighter and darker than the range limits being displayed as white and black respectively The effect is to increase the contrast of the image Each time a change is made click on OK to close the Display Layout dialog box and observe the effect of the change On completing your display experiments restore the defaults Autoscale Intensity and Full Range checked and close the data file Displaying a Z Slice 1 Open a data file with multiple frames 2 Position the cursor in the data window 3 Click on Z slice button It will cut a section across multiple frames Part 2 Advanced Topics Chapter 6 On Line Data Acquisition Processes cccceeeeeeees 85 Chapter 7 Cleanihg eee eee ner se aie nent on ene RRO Cem A tie eat iaei 89 Chapter 8 ROI Definition amp Binning ccc cseeseeeeeseeeeteeeeens 95 Chapter 9 Correction Techniques 0 ccc cece csseseeseeseeseeseeeceeseens 101 Chapter 10 Image Math 00 0 ccc ccccsececeseeececsecsessecsesseesesseeeesaeseens 105 Chapter 11
11. Uninstalling and Reinstalling If you suspect any of the WinView 32 files have become corrupt you should first delete all WinView 32 files then reinstall the software from the CD or the FTP site Follow the steps below to remove WinView 32 Note that some files may remain They will have to be removed manually To reinstall follow the procedure as described beginning on page 17 To uninstall Win View 32 from your computer 1 Open the Windows Control Panel 2 Double click on Add Remove Programs 3 Highlight the WinView 32 version to uninstall and click on Add Remove Notes 1 The directory in which WinView 32 was originally installed will remain as will any files it contains that were not placed there during the original installation 2 The Data directory created during the original installation may also be deleted Any data files you want to save should be copied to a safe location before uninstalling 3 The Version and User identification will be removed from the registry However the registry also contains much information that was placed there in the course of setting up and operating the software That information will remain and will be available for use if WinView 32 is later reinstalled 4 Follow the instructions on the dialog boxes To later reinstall the software follow the Installing WinView 32 instructions provided earlier in this chapter Use the original installation CD and any options disks purchased sep
12. Clear Never Don t ever clear the CCD Useful for performing a readout after an exposure has been aborted Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 43 Clear Pre Exposure Before each exposure clears the CCD the number of times specified by the Number of Cleans entry This mode can be used in a sequence It is most useful when there is a considerable amount of time between exposures Clear Pre Sequence Before each sequence clears the CCD the number of times specified by the Number of Cleans entry If no sequence is set up this mode behaves as if the sequence has one exposure The result is the same as using Clear Pre Exposure Clear Post Sequence Clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Clear Pre Post Sequence Clears Number of Cleans times before each sequence and clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Clear Pre Exposure Post Sequence Clears Number of Cleans times before each exposure and clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Use Continuous Cleans Inst
13. 192 168 44 217 2 The Print Setup dialog box is similar to that p Paper j p Orientation found in many Windows Size Letter G Portrait programs You can use the default pri nter or Source Automatically Select X Landscape select a specific printer z from the list of installed Network Cancel devices For information on installing printer drivers consult the Windows documentation The Options button shows more features of the selected printer driver again a standard Windows feature Figure 120 Print Setup dialog box 3 Select the Paper Size and Source The Landscape format where the paper is wider than it is tall is probably the best way to print out data 4 Click on OK to execute the printer setup selections or Cancel to exit the dialog leaving the original settings unchanged 129 130 WinView 32 Manual Printing Directly from WinView 32 This procedure assumes you have already set up the printer you will be using 1 From the File menu open the Print dialog box Figure 121 2 Select the number of copies and pages if a file contains multiple frames each will be printed as a separate page 3 Click on OK to initiate the print Notes Version 2 5 1 Print 2 x p Printer Name Properties Status Ready Type HP Laseret 5Si 5Si MX PS Where PISE LJ5S1 Comment HPLJ5SI Software 192 168 44 217 T Print to file r Print range Copies C all Number of copi
14. 4 Reopen the Axes tab page and 2 C change the axis labels back to their original designations Pixel for horizontal Strip for vertical Changing the Color of Default Display Layout a the Axes and Labels General Range Color Akes 3D Layout image Layout Cursor 1 Open the Color tab page Note that Nomia ests I Aive 20 Bren _ Kl there is a button for each item to cusa MarkerGraphs _ which a color can be assigned and Backaround HE Normal Hidden Surtace C that the current color for each item is indicated in a color swatch to the right of the button The default for Figure 77 Fonts dialog box avis EO Marker Hidden Sur the Axis is yellow 2 Click on Axis The color palette gee een CA Help will open Figure 78 es ey Figure 78 Color tab page 82 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Select a different color by clicking on the swatch of the desired color Then click on OK to close the Color dialog box and on OK again to close the Display Layout dialog box The axes and colors will now appear with the new color Repeating the process open the Color dialog box again and restore the default color Again click on OK to close the Color dialog box and on OK again to close the Display Layout dialog box The axes and labels will now be Custom colors displayed in the original color Tawa BEE Raa sa Define Custom Colors gt gt Caoa Figure 79 Display Layout Color Palette
15. Cancel Help Figure 80 Experiment SetuplProcesses tab page On Line Thresholding Description On line thresholding allows a threshold test to be performed on data as it is acquired The threshold test is performed after background subtraction and flatfield correction but before software accumulation Data that falls within the threshold range returns a 1 data that falls below the minimum threshold or above the maximum returns a 0 In an experiment containing n accumulations only one data set is stored but with the data added from each accumulation Thus if a given bit contained data within the threshold range on 7 of 10 iterations the value of the bit in the acquired data set would be 7 The minimum and maximum levels can be independently set and checkboxes allow the minimum and maximum threshold functions to be independently toggled on or off Online Thresholding Setup T Enable Minimum E I Enable Maximum F Cancel Help Figure 81 Online Thresholding Setup dialog box 85 86 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Parameters Enable Minimum The check box allows the Minimum threshold function to be switched ON checked or OFF unchecked When the function is ON you can enter the minimum threshold level This can be any positive or negative value in the range of possible intensities provided the setting is lower than the Maximum setting This setting will be retained when the function is switched OFF When
16. I O Address 2 and 3 High Speed PCI only These addresses are reported but cannot be changed address selection is automatic and under computer control With other interfaces these addresses are not displayed 42 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Entering the Cleans Skips Characteristics Caution For most applications the default Hin settings will give the best results We ContolevCamera Display Interface Cleans Skips advise contacting the factory for guidance before changing these parameters from their default values peaz Exception With a PI MAX camera Number of Cesar i we suggest settings of Cleans 1 and Number of Strips per Clean o Strips per Clean 4 Minimum Block Size 16 and Number of Blocks 32 Clear Pre Exposure x Clean Mode I Use Continuous Cleans Instruction The Cleans Skips tab page allows you to change the clean and skip parameters psa ee from their default values or to reload the dialog g E default values Figure 24 shows all of the Number of Blocks 288 4 fields and check boxes that exist on the Cleans Skips tab page WinView 32 will display and hide features based on the controller version All of the features shown are described in the text that ok Cancel Hep follows Refer to Chapter 7 Cleaning for additional information Load Default Values Reloads the factory defaults from the NVRAM Figure 24 Cleans Skips tab page Cleans Cleans are applied to t
17. Main tab card Exposure Time Enter a value The exposure time can either be greater than the readout time or it can be equal to the readout time If you want an exposure time gt readout time enter a value larger than the readout time calculated when the virtual chip definition was downloaded If you want an exposure time readout time enter 000 sec Number of Images Enter the desired number of images Use Region of Interest Accumulations 1 ADC tab card Type FAST ROI Setup tab card Make no changes to the settings on this tab card unless you have re enabled Normal Operating Mode ROI setup for Virtual Chip High Speed Mode is performed through the Virtual Chip dialog box 10 From the Setup menu select Virtual Chip and enter the following settings High Speed Mode Enabled Virtual Chip Definition The settings below assume a 47x47 pixel virtual chip The X and Y dimensions are established by the external mask The virtual chip is fully flexible in the X direction However the set of choices for the Y dimension has been pre selected for optimal performance Note that the origin point that Princeton Instruments uses for a CCD array is 1 1 Chip Y Dimension 47 Select this dimension from the drop down list Chip X Dimension 47 Enter this dimension manually 11 Click on the Load Default Values button This enters the default ROI values These values are Start pixels of 1 1 End pixels based on the Chip Y and Chip X dimension
18. Post Acquisition Mask Processes 115 Smoothing Functions Parameters tab page Smoothing is also accomplished by mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Smoothing Parameters tab page Figure 106 These masks sometimes called low pass filters attenuate regions with om eel high contrast while leaving pixels in regions of low iA TECER contrast almost unchanged Figure 105 illustrates the smoothing filter effect Input Parameters Output DA b 0 1 0a foz fm ar rat foi Figure 105 Original Image left and Smoothed Image Figure 106 Smoothing Parameters right tab page pa kuss n k Smoothing Procedure Use the following procedure to smooth an image 1 Select Smoothing from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best one 6 To seta specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernal parameters to their new values 7 Click on Apply to b
19. Remote Remote is primarily intended for spectroscopy applications where an external shutter would be placed ahead of the entrance slit Electronic Electronic only applies to operation with an intensified camera which would normally not be equipped with a mechanical shutter This selection would apply to both the Gate and Shutter CW modes of the ITC 100 IIC 200 IIC 300 MCP 100 and PI MAX Custom This shutter type is automatically selected if you are using a PVCAM supported camera When Custom is the shutter type you will be able to enter the shutter close compensation time in the field below the shutter type Shutter close compensation time delays readout to allow time for the shutter to fully close The close value will vary depending on the camera and the shutter used Shutter Open Compensation Time Delays the exposure until the shutter is fully open The open delay value will vary depending on the camera and the shutter used Readout Mode The readout mode is determined by the characteristics of the CCD array and the controller The possible choices are Full Frame The entire chip can be read out Frame Transfer Only the unmasked area of the chip can be read out Frame transfer is only available if the camera has a frame transfer chip such as the EEV 512 x 1024 Interline Provides 100 duty cycle operation Interline is only available with a camera having an interline chip such as the PI 1300 x 1030 38 WinView 32 Man
20. Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup The S button on the Custom Toolbar allows ES you to select the PTG or DG535 trigger mode intemal Frequency 1000 He a aia Sensei Internal or External while acquiring data Extemal Cancel Help External The Timing Generator will be triggered by trigger signals that originate inan Figure 145 Timing Generator Interactive external piece of equipment Trigger Setup Internal The Timing Generator will create its own trigger signals at the selected frequency 148 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 15 Custom Toolbar Settings Introduction The Custom Toolbar feature of WinView 32 allows you one button access to many features or combinations of features available through the software The Custom Toolbar layout and the number of buttons displayed on the Custom Toolbar can easily be changed Displaying the Custom Toolbar 1 To make the Custom Toolbar visible select Toolbars and then Custom on the View menu The Custom Toolbar will appear on the desktop and its default configuration will be as shown in Figure 146 2 You can change position of the Custom Toolbar its layout and the number of buttons it contains Figure 146 Default Custom Toolbar Customizing the Toolbar Although the Custom Toolbar defaults with the buttons shown in Figure 146 many additional buttons are in fact available and can be added to the button
21. Display Range 1 Click on The data display will shift so that it only fills the 5 to 95 region of the window range Had the data initially extended all the way to the window boundary the data display would have been slightly compressed to fit within the 5 95 range 2 Click on restoring the image to its initial appearance 3 Before advancing to the next topic open the View menu Then select the Small cursor and deselect Cross Sections Selecting a Region of Interest 1 Using the mouse drag a rectangular region on the image as shown in Figure 65 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 ED H H H H H H H H 4 H ba M Figure 65 Hid lamp spe 3D Graph with Region selected for viewing 2 Click on Ql Zoom In The view will change so that only the selected region is displayed as shown in Figure 66 74 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 E Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Figure 66 Hide lamp spe 3D Graph expanded to show Defined Region 3 Click on Ql Undo All Zoom In The original view will be restored Information box On the View menu select Info The information box should appear as shown in Figure 67 The first line reports the intensity and pixel number at the cursor position The second line reports the frame number strip number and the pixel number The intensity in A D counts is reported at the X and Y position corresponding to the cursor position If a region
22. Driver rspipci sys Type 1 Name Cameral Driver rspipci sys Port 0 Port 0 Camera_2 gt Camera_1 Type 1 Type 1 Name Camera2 Name Camera2 Driver apausb sys Driver apausb sys Port 0 Port 0 196 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Note The Camera_ must be changed so the camera supported by the USB interface will be recognized the USB driver is apausb sys For consistency you may also want to change the camera names 6 Save the file With the ST 133 connected and on open WinView 32 The formerly grayed out functions should now be available Error Creating Controller message This message may be displayed if you are using the USB 2 0 interface and have not run the RSConfig exe program see previous topic if the PVCAM INI file has been corrupted or if the ST 133 was not turned on before you started WinView 32 and began running the Hardware Wizard WinView 32 INFORMATION E4 iWinView 32 INFORMATION Ed Error Creating Controller Error 129 Error Creating Controller Error 183 Figure 167 Error Creating Controller dialog boxes Error 129 Indicates that the problem is with the PVCAM INI file Close WinView 32 run RSConfig make sure the ST 133 is on reopen WinView and begin running the Hardware Wizard Error 183 Indicates that the ST 133 is off If you are running the Hardware Wizard when this message appears click on OK turn on the ST 133 and on the PVCAM dialog box make sure Y
23. FITS File Converter ME E fy FITS Header Format Standard _ _ C Custom Run Experiment Display FITS File Primary Data Wink 32 Data Convert SPE File s Save Header to File Keyword Value Comment Value Type tinie Figure 150 FITS dialog box Macro Record WXmacrec opt Macro Record is a convenient method to automate routines and repetitive data acquisition and analysis tasks A macro is created automatically whenever a sequence of operations is performed in WinView The recorded macro generates a VBScript file that can be edited to provide maximum flexibility For more information refer to the WinView 32 online help and the PDF of the WinX32 Programming for Macro Record manual provided as part of the option package Typically the manual is stored in the WinView32 Documentation directory when you install the option Note As part of the Macro option installation the Macro menu is added to the WinView 32 menu bar Option Explicit Sub Main Dim Wink Set WinX CreateObject JinX32 Winx3Zapp Dim ExpVB Set ExpVB CreateObject Wink32 ExpSetup Dim Docs Set Docs CreateObject Wink32 DocFiles Dim Winds Set Winds CreateObject Wink32 DocWindows Do Not Edit Above This Line Figure 151 Macro Record dialog box 156 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Virtual Chip WXvchip opt Fully supported by WinView Version 2 5 when the communication protocol is TA
24. Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 I Hide lamp spe 3D Graph expanded to show Defined Region eee 74 Graphical Display with Information DOX ecsseescesececeeeeeececeeseeeeeeaeeaeees 74 Single Strip displayed graphically cccccesccesscssseeeseeeneeeseeeseeeseesecneenseens 75 3D display with Cursor Curve and Marker Curves ccccesccsssceeseeeseeeteeseees TA 3D Plot with Hidden Surfaces ssssseeesesseeseseseseesssseseseessssesessesssesersessesesest 78 Display Layout dialog DOX cccccccsecsseesseceteceeceseceseceecseeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeeteeenaes 79 Range tab pa eins erare eie beanies edad EEA EE EE E EET 79 Selecting the Large Cursor cccccccccssecsseceseceseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeneesseeeseeeseecsaeeneenes 79 Circuit spe with Axes and Cross Sections c cccccecccesseeseesteesteeseeeteceeenaeens 80 TinfOrmation BOX ec E E SE E E 80 AROS tab pa Teri nste eieiei oeer ireen a A E abel A E E 81 Fonts dialog DOX osineen aaa oe a a E AE TAa iA aa iasa 81 Color tab page sirna a a E EEA E O ERE 81 Display Layout Color Palette cccccccccsseesecscecsecsseceseceseceeeeeseesseeeeeeeeenaes 82 Experiment Setup Processes tab page ccccccccssccssecsteceteceteceeeeeseeeeeeteeeseeeaaes 85 Online Thresholding Setup
25. Set to 0 initially and disabled Enable and increase the gain for low light level images Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Shutter mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are quite susceptible to damage from light overload in Shutter mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gated mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your manual for detailed information Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for Shutter mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual 3 On the Timing tab page Figure 28 set the following parameters Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections Note Not all of these parameters are ADE Timing Processes Save Load provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system Timing Mode Timing Mode Free Run For PI MAX External Sync gt Continuous Cleans system Ext Sync for DG535 Int Sync E for PTG Shutter Control Triggered Mode not checked Normal z I Pre Open Continuous Cleans not checked For z PI MAX system checked for DG535 C Fast Mode unchecked for PTG Shutter Control Normal For PI MAX Delay Time focoo y Seconds system Disabled O
26. consequential damages so the above provisions may not apply to you When contacting us for technical support or service assistance please refer to the Princeton Instruments factory of purchase contact your authorized Princeton Instruments representative or reseller or visit our technical support page at Wwww piacton com Contact Information Roper Scientific s manufacturing facility for this product is located at the following address Princeton Instruments 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 Customer Support E mail techsupport piacton com For immediate support in your area please call the following locations directly America 1 877 4 PIACTON 877 474 2286 Benelux 31 347 324989 France 33 1 60 86 03 65 Germany 49 0 89 660 7793 Japan 81 3 5639 2741 UK amp Ireland 44 0 28 3831 0171 Otherwise see our Support web page at www piacton com An up to date list of addresses and telephone numbers is posted on the www piacton com Support page In addition links on this page to support topics allow you to send e mail based requests to the Customer Support group Index 3D graph display eniin einn n entered 70 procedure eee Reeve ote Rees 71 3D layout TANGO AEE es fucced s IEEE ET 78 Z AXIS endpoint assisen ieii 78 A B Absolute math operation sseeseseeeseeeeseeeessrseesse 107 Addition math operation
27. the Detector Temperature dialog box will not display current temperature information while you are acquiring data Temperature Control for Other Systems ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 Controller Change the dial setting on the front panel of the Controller PentaMax Set the temperature on the front panel of the Temperature Power Supply unit MicroView Not user settable Temperature is solely under software control Chapter 3 Cleans and Skips Initial Data Collection 47 With some controllers specifically the PentaMAX ST 130 ST 133 and ST 138 there is a Cleans Skips tab page in the Hardware Setup dialog box Cleans are used to reduce charge buildup on the CCD array while waiting to begin data acquisition Skips are used when the Region of Interest ROI is smaller than the full chip they allow binning and quick traversing of the rows that precede and follow the ROI For the procedures that follow load the default values for these parameters by bringing the Cleans Skips tab page to the front and then clicking on Load Defaults followed by Yes Exception With a PI MAX camera Cleans should be set to 1 and Strips per Clean to 4 Experiment Setup Procedure all controllers 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog box Figure 27 from the Acquisition menu or by clicking on the S4l button on the Custom Toolbar Experiment Setup ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections Expo
28. unsigned unsigned char char int unsigned int long long long char char int in in in char float int in in in in float long float float char unsigned float unsigned unsigned unsigned ELAT ENA N E O S unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned in in ct ct in in in in in a Os ok int in in ct ct int int int int int int long long long int int calibnan 10 BackGrndApplied astdiode minblk numminb1k calibpol 4 ADCrate ADCtype ADCresolution ADCcbitAdjust gain exprem 5 80 geometric xlabel 16 cleans NumSkpPerCln califile 16 bkgdfile 16 srecmp ydim scramble lexpos inoscan lavgexp stripfil 16 version 16 type flatFieldApplied spare 8 kin_trig_mode empty 702 clkspd_us HWaccumF lag StoreSync BlemishApplied CosmicApplied CosmicType CosmicThreshold NumFrames MaxIntensity MiniIntensity ylabel LABELMAX ShutterType shutterComp readoutMode WindowSize clkspd interface_type ioAdd1 ioAdd2 ioAdd3 intLevel GPIBadd Data Structure JR JF jE fed ge pods eo As E L fe A erg JAL ae eas ogee fe 1 at fe A eA feds
29. you will need to edit the PVCAM INI file created by RSConfig See the instructions in Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer are Choices on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog page 193 RSConfig 2 6 x Names Style Camera 1 Camerat Princeton Style USB2 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 1 RSConfig dialog box Changing Installed Components Repairing or Uninstalling Reinstalling WinView 32 Refer to Appendix D Starting WinView 32 Before starting WinView 32 follow the hardware interconnection and power up instructions in the hardware manuals supplied with your system Then open the Windows Program manager and start WinView 32 by clicking on WinView32 in the PI Acton folder see Figure 2 Note You can start WinView 32 even if you have not installed the interface card or if you have not turned on the controller If there is no interface card WinView 32 will run in Demo mode This mode allows you to look at and post process previously stored data such as the sample data installed with the software and to become familiar with experiment setup and data acquisition Some features will not be available because the program looks for information from the controller and camera while WinView 32 is loading and initializing Installing and Starting WinView 32 25 Chapter 1 d E WirViews2 Windows 2000 Professional Figure 2 Openin
30. 1 X2Ym 1 XnYm 1 V X1Ym X2Ym XnYm The data is stored as sequential points and the X Y and Frame dimensions are determined by the header The X dimension of the stored data is in xdim Offset 42 The Y dimension of the stored data is in ydim Offset 656 The size of a frame in bytes is One frame size xdim x ydim x datatype Offset 108 The number of frames of data stored is in NumFrames Offset 1446 Appendix C CD ROM Failure Work Arounds Although not common there are CD drives that are not compatible with the Win 95 long filename convention Attempting to install on such a system causes the filenames to be truncated and the install fails causing a message like An error occurred during the move data process 113 Component Application WinXSystem File Group WinXSystem Fortunately there are a couple of workarounds both involving copying the install files to the customer s hard drive first then installing the software from that location 1 If possible copy the files to the customer s hard drive via another computer that supports long file names If the customer s computer is part of a network then the files can be copied first to the hard drive of a computer that supports long file names then transferred through the network to the customer s hard drive Check the list of files below to make sure that the long filenames remain intact Then install the software from this location on
31. 1340 x 100 400 or 1300 family is exclusive to Princeton Instruments 1536 array format is 1536 x 1032 pixels 2032 array format is 2025 x 2032 pixels 2500 array format is 2500 x 600 rectangular pixels 3072 array format is 3072 x 2048 pixels Appendix B Data Structure Version 1 43 Header All WinView or WinSpec files version 1 43 must begin with the following 4100 byte header typedef WINXHEAD 0 int dioden CCD X dimension ay 2 int avgexp Not used by WinView kiy 4 int exposure exposure if 1 see lexpos A 6 int datarange Not used by WinView 8 int mode Not used by WinView 10 float wexsy Not used by WinView 14 int asyavg Not used by WinView x7 16 int asyseq Not used by WinView 7 18 int linefreq Not used by WinView a 20 int date0 Not used by WinView aA 22 int datel Not used by WinView E 24 int date2 Not used by WinView EJ 26 int date3 Not used by WinView ep 28 int date4 Not used by WinView eh 30 int ehour Not used by WinView yf 32 int eminute Not used by WinView y 34 int noscan of stripes collected if 1 see Ey lnoscan xy 36 int fastacc Not used by WinView 38 int avgtime Not used by WinView 40 int dmatotal Not used by WinView 27 42 int faccount X dimension Actual dim of image 44 int stdiode Not used by WinView 46 float nanox Not used by WinView 50 float calibdio 10
32. 135 Programming the Delayed Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger Outputs 1 2 Set the Delay Trigger and Aux Trigger initial delay Set the Delay Trigger output to be synchronized to either the Trigger or the Gate pulse Set the Aux Trigger output to be ones xl synchronized to either the Trigger or the Gate pulse Click on the Gating tab Figure 126 Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button For safety the Gating Mode HV Pulsing selection should be Disabled Note In setting the PG200 gating parameters whether for Repetitive or Sequential operation see your PG200 Appl Changed Settings Apply All Settings Manual for pulse width and delay Baat Helo limitations Note that gate pulses are capacitively coupled in many Princeton Instruments intensified camera heads so high duty cycles and gate widths longer than 1 ms may lead to reduced gating efficiency Triggers Gating Comm Port Gating Made HV Pulsina Enabled Disabled Figure 126 PG200 Gating tab page Repetitive Mode oe ds Repetitive Gating Setup xj If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Gate Width Gate Del Gating setup dialog box will appear as i Paii shown in Figure 127 In the Repetitive H frec z 100 frees z gating mode the Gate Width and Gate T gt E Delay remain constant over the course Repeal Wikti Delap far of the measurement Set the Gate Width i S
33. 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input j Mathmatical Typa image does not appear in the Input Image box con enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the button to Average the right of the field 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame Cross Settional Type containing the data on which the operation is Pye seed to be performed pee eee 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input C Y Dross Section Image enter the appropriate X Y range values E A Alternatively draw an ROI in the active window using the mouse and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Ti Apply Clase Help 5 On the Parameters tab page select either Sum or Average If Sum is selected all pixel Figure 117 Cross Section Parameters values in the X Y or Z direction according tab page to whether X Cross Section Y Cross Section or Z Cross Section is selected will be summed to generate the output If Average is selected the average ofall of the pixel values in the X Y or Z direction will be summed to produce the output 126 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 6 On the Parameters tab page select X Cross Section Y Cross Section or Z Cross Section whichever is wanted 7 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data
34. 32 Manual Version 2 5 The configuration of clean cycles is performed on MZZEME the Hardware Setup Cleans Skips tab page Teese ils aie CERN Figure 84 When you set up the camera for the first time default values are automatically inserted ae into these fields These will give the best results es for most applications Even so it is a good idea to know what these entries mean with regard to te cleaning ELE I Use Continuous Cleans Instruction Number of Strips per Clear 40 IP Let s begin with Number of Strips per Clean This parameter sets the number of rows that will ears be shifted and discarded per clean cycle While a angina NE ad large number such as the number of rows in the a ack i array may result in the best cleaning of the array the tradeoff is that there may be a significant delay between the receipt of a start exposure signal NOT SCAN signal at the SCAN BNC goes high and the beginning of the actual exposure This delay occurs because the current clean cycle must be completed before a start exposure signal received during the cycle will be implemented Typically the default setting is much smaller and in time critical experiments the setting should be 1 or 2 Figure 84 Cleans Skips tab page The Number of Cleans value is usually set to zero 0 These are additional clean cycles that can be required after a start exposure signal is received and the current clean cycle has finis
35. 3800 3808 3809 3810 3891 offset for absolute data scaling factor for absolute data scaling selected scaling unit reserved special string for scaling reserved flag if calibration is valid current input units for calib_value linear UNIT and used in the polynom_coeff ORDER of calibration POLYNOM valid calibration data pairs pixel pos of calibration data calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEFFICIENTS laser wavenumber for relativ WN reserved If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d Calibration Expansion area te 27 A As x ay xy ae 2 x sf Z aS X7 RA eS End of Calibration Structures char char int Istring 40 empty3 80 lastvalue Version 2 5 Header 3 23 04 nor nor ct ct Q zol wv ORD hor p O o nor nor ORD nar nort nar nort ct ct ct ct NANAZNHNAMHAZETNHN DN loa hor ORD hor ct ct nan mh ct The current data file used for WINX files consists of a 4100 1004 Hex byte header followed by the data Beginning with Version 2 5 many more items were added to the header to make it a complete as possible record of the data collection This includes spectrograph and pulser information Many of these additions were accomplished by recycling old information that had not been used in previous versions All data files created under previous 2 x versions of WinView WinSp
36. B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 000000010101 21 OR A bitwise OR operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file An eight bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 010101111111 1407 Exclusive OR A bitwise Exclusive OR operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file An eight bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 010101101010 1386 Complement For each pixel value n in the A file the corresponding value in the output file C is set to 1 n Otherwise stated each 0 becomes a 1 and each 1 a 0 Binary Operations NOT For each pixel in the A file all non zero values yield a zero and all zero values only yield a one The resulting values are written to the corresponding point of the C file Chapter 10 Procedure Image Math 109 Select the operation to be performed on the Operation tab page Enter the first input filename on the A tab page If the operation involves two files or one file and a constant enter the second file name on the B tab page or enter the value of the constant on the B tab page If you want to proce
37. CCD made by Hamamatsu HS High speed MicroMAX system runs at 5 MHz FT Frame transfer detector M MPP multi pin phasing CCD P Usually CCD offered exclusively by Princeton Instruments PDA Photodiode array R Deep depletion S Usually refers to SITe arrays also see TK TK CCD made by SITe formerly Tektronix sometimes labeled S UV UV to VIS standard lumogen coating for UV response to 195 nm UVAR Permanent UV to NIR A R coating on some SITe CCDs not lumogen metachrome VISAR Permanent VIS to NIR A R coating on some SITe CCDs not lumogen metachrome Y Interline CCD made by Sony 1 grade 1 CCD 2 grade 2 CCD 3 grade 3 CCD 64 array format is 1024 x 64 pixels 100 array format is 1340 x 100 pixels 128 array format is 1024 x 128 pixels 256 256 element linear array 400 array format is 1340 x 400 pixels 512 array format is 512 x 512 pixels or 512 elements for linear arrays 576 array format is 576 x 384 pixels 768 array format is 768 x 512 pixels 782 array format is 782 x 582 pixels 1000 array format is 1000 x 800 pixels 1024 array format is 1024 x 256 EEV or Hamamatsu or 1024 x 1024 SITe 1100 array format is 1100 x 330 pixels 1242 array format is 1152 x 1242 pixels 1280 array format is 1280 x 1024 pixels 170 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1300 array format is 1300 x 1030 pixels Sony or 1300 x 1340 pixels EEV 1317 array format is 1317 x 1035 pixels 1340 array format is
38. Chip CCD Chip defined ROI pattem Figure 90 Single Full width ROI CCD Chip partial width ROI pattern Figure 91 Single Partial width ROI CCD Chip ROI Pattern 1 ROI Pattern 2 ROI Pattern 3 Figure 92 Multiple Full width ROIs defined ROI computer ROI computer ROI computer ROI computer ROI defined ROI eRe Rr TEE T en Figure 93 Multiple ROIs with Different Widths 98 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Constraints on Defining Multiple Regions of Interest ROIs General You may create more than 10 ROIs but when data is acquired using these ROIs the parameter information for only the first 10 ROIs will be stored when you save the data In this mode ROIs can have ATENE varying sizes and degrees of overlap However when you define multiple ROIs like those in Figure 93 the computer automatically generates six side effect ROIs in the regions where extensions of the strips and columns of the defined ROIs intersect Both the defined and computer generated ROIs will be stored and the data for both will be displayed see Figure 94 The side effect ROIs are necessary to accommodate hardware limitations Figure 94 Multiple Imaging ROIs and Resulting Data DEFINED RESULTING DATA Labeled boxes are user defined ROls Those without labels are computer generated Methods
39. Data File Save As dialog box specified file type Save as type Indicates the file type The data RET x types currently supported are listed in Figure 40 B bit TIFF File ti If All Files is selected you will be able to All Files f save the file with any extension Figure 40 Save As Data Types The file however will be saved in the SPE file type format Only the data is saved This could have some unexpected effects For example if you save a graph as a tif file and then open the file with an image editor you will see the data presented as a single strip image not as a graph 4 Click on OK to save the file or Cancel to close the Data File Save As dialog without saving the file Chapter 4 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 59 Data File tab page The Data File tab page provides you with ADC Timing Processes Save Load additional control and flexibility in naming and Man Data Fie AO Setup Data Conections saving newly collected data Because the settings Data File Name on this tab page are applied to data acquisition not Name fal post processing make your entries before acquiring data The auto save auto name and Auta Increment File Name auto increment features allow you to acquire data Z Enable CurentVaiue 10 and save it according to the filename template you define Also you can take advantage of the j Overwite Append Data Type multiple open windows fun
40. Figure 59 ROI resized to correct Line wrapping The font can be changed after the label is printed on the display 70 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This is the label Hg Argon Figure 60 Display after changing Font Selection To change the background or color the label must be erased and reprinted it can only be altered inside the edit box Data Displayed as a 3D Graph Data files can be opened as 3D graphs from the Open dialog box Figure 61 shows a 3D graph with five data strips Figure 45 page 62 shows a 3D graph with two data strips Both examples illustrate the behavior of the Auto Select algorithm as discussed on page 61 The following paragraphs contain procedures for opening and displaying data in graphical format Figure 61 3D Graph with Five Data Strips Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 71 Displaying Hid lamp spe The data file used in this exercise is Hid lamp spe one of the data files supplied with your WinView 32 software 1 From the File menu select Open The Open dialog box Figure 62 will appear allowing you to select the image to be opened The Look In box provides a browser function so that the directory where the images are located can be easily accessed By default the data directory is a subdirectory of WinView program directory Files of the specified type the WinView 32 data type is 7 x Open Look in Sa Data ec Er flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec step2 SPE tq H
41. How these images are processed Z Lepiaci is briefly described below aa Laplacian 3 A mask is ann x n matrix n is 3 for all Oi WinView 32 operations that is placed over every L__ eens n x n subsection of the image Each parameter in the mask is multiplied by the corresponding value of the image The results are summed and placed pi in the central position in the output file An fF example will help illustrate the process 1 y 1 oe l 1 1 fi The following is the Laplacian 1 mask used to enhance edges mo Apply Close Help Figure 102 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page 1 11 1 118 1 ak 1 l 1 Here is an example of a 3 x 3 subsection of an image The middle pixel has the coordinates 100 100 20 20 19 20 21 20 20 19 20 Multiply each pair of corresponding numbers and sum the products 1 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 19 1 x 20 8 x 21 1 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 19 1 x 20 10 The result is placed at position 100 100 in the output image file The mask is now placed over the 9 pixels centered at 101 100 and the procedure is repeated Chapter 11 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 113 Laplacian Masks The three Laplacian masks on the Edge Enhancement dialog box operate just as described above Since the sum of the mask coefficients of the Laplacians sum to zero the result of a Laplacian operation on a regi
42. Number of Blocks 5 while appearing to work will result in invalid data Instead you must change these settings to 1 and 256 respectively for the 2 D OMA array Chapter 3 Initial Data Collection Introduction WARNING The procedure in this chapter will enable you to begin collecting real image data promptly Minimum requirements are assumed If your system is more complex e g requiring consideration of complex timing and synchronization issues you will have to carefully study the other chapters of this manual as well as the manuals provided for the system hardware components before data acquisition that addresses those needs will be possible Nevertheless it is a good idea to begin with the simplest possible operating mode This approach will give you operating experience and familiarity that will prove very valuable when you go to make more complex measurements For additional information about the various menus and dialog boxes refer to the online Help topics Underlying assumptions for the following procedure are that the hardware has been installed per the instructions in the hardware manual s and that the hardware setup as discussed in Chapter 2 has been completed A further assumption is that a good imaging subject is available Often a picture or optical target mounted on a wall or lab bench will give good results If initial data collection is to be done using a microscope be sure to read the chapter on microscopy in yo
43. WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 CD ROM Failure Work Arounds provides advice on how to successfully complete the installation in situations where the CD ROM doesn t support long file names WinView 32 Repair and Maintenance provides information on how to repair reinstall and uninstall WinView 32 components USB 2 0 Limitations covers the currently known limitations associated with operating under the USB 2 0 interface Troubleshooting USB 2 0 provides solutions to communication problems that may occur when operating under the USB 2 0 interface Glossary includes brief definitions of terms used in relation to WinView 32 and the system hardware The WINVIEW CHM online documentation contains e Information that is in this manual e Step by step instructions on how to use WinView functions e Reference information about WinView and its functions and e Context sensitive help which describes a screen or menu item that is being pointed to or that is active when a Help button is clicked on Tool Tips and Status Bar Messages Placing the mouse cursor on a button and resting it there for a few seconds causes a brief tool tip message to appear that describes the button s function Tool tips are also provided for the individual panes of the Status Bar at the bottom of the WinView 32 window Note that tool tips only appear at the desktop level Tool tips are not provided for the buttons on the individual dialog boxes and tab pages Mor
44. a a a e tosses edhbeae 129 Setting vip the Printers wc fcc Ficscesai Seite halos sk asks wand E T E E ES 129 Printing Directly from Win VieW 32 0 ccccceccseesseesseesceeceescecsaeceseceseceseceseesaeeeseeeeeesaeeaaes 130 Prinit PLEVICW scores obs icc scunest ra aiates cn cadet ea daleeast oath E a E a ecesnchalaget hs cone ds 130 Printing a S reen Capture remsen cienie e cessed a EE EE E ojuaeeeitedetessasvanesives 131 Saving as TIF and Printing srporioriir ape eae a a a ETE a a EREET E RAN TTE 132 Chapter 14 Pulser Operation 00 c iit iiiiinnnineeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 133 TAO AUC EL OT 02503 da ca cnn 35884 Goa dg cs a e Ps ga vee dese cone dans vie Sheds ewes aah stn Gan E sueae deer AN 133 PG200 Programmable Pulse Generator cccceeccessceesceeseeeseeeseeeeecseeceecstecneenseenseenaes 133 Programmable Timing Generator PTG cccccssecsseesseesecneceseceseceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaes 137 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator eccccceccseesseesecnsecsseceseceseceseenseeneeeeeeeneeeeseenses 140 Sequential Mode Parameters ccccccccssesssecsseestecsseceseceseceseceeceneceseeeseecssecsaecnseenseeeaeens 143 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup ccccccccssecssecsseceseceneceeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeesaes 147 Chapter 15 Custom Toolbar SettinGS cccccsssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeees 149 TRtrOCUC HON sa s5Fesca oofhezetsSdasea tes a n batheze A E AE dtc A tne E 149 Displaying
45. below Imin are mapped to the value of Ofirst and input levels above Imax are mapped to the value of Olast Imin Imax Imin Imax represents inclusive input range to be remapped Ofirst Ofirst is the output value for Imin or I1 02 O2 is the output value for I2 03 O3 is the output value for 13 04 O4 is the output value for 14 Olast Olast is the output value for Imax Example The following example is for a one to one mapping As stated previously the entries after Imin and Imax are output levels Based on the Imin and Imax values there are 5 output values 7 3 1 In this example every input intensity less than 3 Imin gets mapped to 20 3 Imin is mapped to 20 7 Imax is mapped to 10 and every input intensity greater than 7 Imax is mapped to 10 Olast Input intensities 4 5 and 6 are mapped to 22 23 and 26 respectively 3 7 20 22 23 26 10 Chapter 11 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 121 Format 2 This format is not a one to one mapping in that input intensities between Imin and Imax inclusive can be omitted from the list of In Out pairs Imin and Imax the minimum and maximum input levels inclusive are supplied in the first line with a comma delimiter This format expects an arbitrary number of entries in the form of In Out and the In Out pairs may be listed in any order The In value must be between Imin and Imax inclusive Anything less than Imin is mapped to the first Input mapping Anything greater than
46. by pixel with the B file and the smaller of the two values written to the C file It is also possible to compare each pixel of the A file with a constant entered on the B tab page with the smaller of the two values written to the C file MAX The A file is compared pixel by pixel with the B file and the larger of the two values written to the C file It is also possible to compare each pixel of the A file with a constant entered on the B tab page with the larger of the two values written to the C file Non Linear Operations Log10 The Log10 of the A file is computed pixel by pixel and the results written to the C file Natural Log The natural log of the A file is computed pixel by pixel and the results written to the C file Square Root The square root of each point in the A file is computed and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file Squared Each point in the A file is squared and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file Absolute The absolute value of each point in the A file is computed and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file 108 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Bitwise Operations AND A bitwise AND operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file A twelve bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in
47. data future min intensity of data future y axis label shutter type shutter compensation time Readout mode full kinetics window size for kinetics only clock speed for kinetics amp frame transfer computer interface isa taxi pei eisa etc I O address of interface card if more than one address for card etc interrupt level interface card GPIB address if used t Ah 7 x ye ae 2 we Pal KA z A 7 x as fi aye xf x ig i x7 xy 27 ei ay 7 ef 27 ay f ar ies xe RA AY x if Mh f Pik xf 2 xf we ys Ay ny 27 ays a ye xf 173 174 unsigned int unsigned int unsigned int int ControlAdd controllerNum Swmade NumROT struct ROIinfo int int int int int int unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned startx endx groupx starty endy groupy ROTinfob1k 10 char char char float char long FlatField 120 background 120 blemish 120 software_ver UserInfo 1000 WinView_id WinView 32 Manual 1504 GPIB controller address if used 1506 if multiple controller system will have controller data came from as Future Item 1508 Software which created this file 1510 number of ROIs used if 0 assume 1 1512 1630 ROI information left x start value
48. data transfer to the computer would not ordinarily be used in the field High Speed PCI Select if a Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card is installed in your computer and you want data transfer to be interrupt driven This choice would give the highest performance in most situations Figure 23 Interface tab page PCI Timer Allows data transfer to be controlled by a polling timer if a Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card installed Useful for troubleshooting possible interrupt problems computer crashes or system fails to return data Note that data transfer is slower in PCI Timer mode and data overrun more likely Also PCI Timer cannot be used to continuously acquire small Regions of Interest in Safe Mode timing operation PCI Timer is not compatible with Use Interrupts operation a timing mode available when using the ST 138 Controller Demo Allows the software to be exercised without being connected to a controller This mode is used primarily for demonstration purposes or post processing of acquired data and cannot be used in an actual measurement Interrupt Level The interrupt level for a PCI card is reported but cannot be changed Card Number This field only appears if more than one PCI card has been detected in your computer This field allows you to set up the communications parameters so each card is uniquely addressed I O Address The I O Address for a PCI card is reported but cannot be changed
49. external or internal Liquid Cooled Air Cooled Cryo Cooled ccD CcD CCD Camera Detector Camera Detector Camera Detector ST RRR RR RRR eee ee Sy ee PON i i Cables and Hoses l Coolant Circulator i Optional i User I O 5 7 E NE ae acacia S Taxi Cable a AC Power Corda 88888 Detector Controller Cable am a a a Shutter Cable 23272777 Coolant Hose Figure 6 Possible System Configurations Power Supply 110 220 USB Cable Camera with internal controller 110 220 Vly ss a C Computer A Nii ZN EXPERIMENT Figure 7 Air Cooled System with Internal Controller Diagram Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 29 110 220 Detector Controller Interface cable TAXI or USB 2 0 l r o i Shutter l Coolant i 110 220 Circulator Outlet l l l Pe eet l Detector Serial Com 110 22 ee or USB 2 0 l ENS Controller lt Computer a Interface cable TAXI or USB 2 0 Detector Controller i M Camera y Detector Serial Com 110 22 Shutter 1 oe ae Controller P O Z Computer x EXPERIMENT Figure 9 Cryo Cooled System with External Controller Diagram Entering the Default Camera System Parameters into WinView Camera Detection Wizard WinView Versions 2 5 19 6 and later If your software version is earlier than 2 5 19 6 go to the next topic for a description of the Hardware Setup Wizard used in ea
50. have been made 8 Exit from the installation program or choose another program to install perform maintenance on or uninstall Installing More than One Version of WinView 32 You can install more than one version of WinView 32 WinSpec 32 or any combination of the two on a single computer When the Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed simply change the path to a new directory If necessary the install program will automatically create the new directory Caution Do not install both the WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 software packages in the same directory Caution Although several different versions of WinView 32 and or WinSpec 32 can be installed on the same computer without conflicts you should not run more than one version at any one time The manner in which Princeton Instruments software allocates memory for data collection precludes collecting data using two software packages at once It is also possible to install both 16 bit and 32 bit versions of the software in the same computer However keep in mind that WinView 32 will not operate under Windows 3 1 or 3 11 Similarly the device drivers for the 16 bit version of WinView will not function properly under Win 95 or NT PIHWDEF INI amp SESSION DAT WinView 16 and PIHWDEF INI The hardware initialization file PPHWDEF INI is included with 16 bit versions of WinView software The file contains all of the hardware settings necessary to get started and is read
51. in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 On the Parameters tab page select either Bea A Sse Histogram or Cumulative Histogram whichever is wanted Figure 119 Postprocessing Histogram Parameter tab page 6 On the Parameters tab page under Values enter the Low Intensity and High Intensity values These are the Y Max and Y min Then enter the Group Size which is the range of intensity that the software will group together as a single data point In other words if the Group Size is 50 pixels having intensities in the range of 1 50 will be counted and graphed as a single point on the histogram 7 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 8 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 13 Printing Introduction WinView 32 can be used to print images directly Methods are listed below both for direct printing and for using the clipboard to transfer the image to another program for printing Setting up the Printer 1 Open the file you want HEET 2 x to print Make sure that printer window is the active Name PISE LJ5S1 Properties one From the File menu open the Print wie hieni Setup dialog box Type HP Lasenet 5512551 Mx PS Figure 120 Where PISE LJSS Comment HPLJSSI Software
52. increase the sensitivity there is a tradeoff in that it adversely affects the image resolution As a result binning when imaging is normally limited to a few pixels vertically and horizontally 2x2 for example Binning can be set up to occur during data acquisition either while data is being shifted into the shift register hardware binning or after the data has been sent to the host computer software binning Post acquisition binning can be performed on previously acquired data see Binning and Skipping page 126 Hardware Binning Hardware binning is performed before the signal is read out by the preamplifier and may be used to improve the signal to noise S N ratio For signal levels that are readout noise limited this method improves S N ratio linearly with the number of pixels grouped together For signals large enough so that the camera is photon shot noise limited and for all fiber coupled ICCD cameras the S N ratio improvement is roughly proportional to the square root of the number of pixels binned Because hardware binning is performed while the signal is shifted into the readout register the readout time and the burden on computer memory are reduced However this time and memory savings are at the expense of resolution Since shift register pixels typically hold only twice as much charge as image pixels hardware binning of large sections may result in saturation and blooming spilling charge into adjacent pixels If yo
53. is waiting for a start exposure signal and after the data has been readout of the array In addition to clean cycles continuous cleans for kinetics is supported by Version 5 or higher of the ST 133 Controller For kinetics experiments continuous cleans are only applied between the first NOT SCAN low to high transition and the External Sync high to low transition Because of the speed at which the array is then Chapter 7 Cleaning shifted exposed and shifted no further cleaning occurs until the last frame has been exposed and shifted At that point the clean cycles begin again 93 94 WinView 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 Chapter 8 ROI Definition amp Binning Overview General A Region of Interest ROI may be the entire CCD array or it may be a rectangular subregion of the array For data acquisition the definition of such a region is done from the ROI Setup tab page Figure 95 accessible after selecting Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu Easy Bin is a simple way of a defining a single full chip width ROI ROI Setup allows you to create multiple ROIs with greater flexibility in ROI location and width Each ROI is defined in the X and Y direction by a start pixel an end pixel and a group height binning factor After one or more regions have been defined and stored data acquisition will use these regions to determine which information will be read out and displayed and whi
54. keys move it from strip to strip The Home and End keys move the cursor to the strip ends and Shift Home and Shift End move it the first strip and last strip respectively The Insert and Delete keys expand or contract the data about the cursor position Restore the 3D display by selecting 3D Graph on the Display Layout General tab page Cursor The cursor s appearance and behavior are a bit different with graphical plots than with image plots as detailed in the following table Table 3 Cursor Appearance and Behavior for Images and Graphs Mone noco _NoCusor _NoCunor Small cross both mouse and arrow keys can place cursor at any pixel on image Home and End keys move cursor to end points on strip Shift Home moves cursor to first strip Shift End moves it to the last strip Small cross left right arrow keys select pixel on strip up down arrow keys select strip to be displayed Home key moves to first pixel End key to last pixel Small cross left right arrow keys change selected pixel on strip Home key moves to first pixel End key to last pixel Up down arrow keys move cursor from strip to strip Shift Home moves to first strip Shift End to last Strips may all be from WinView 32 Manual Large cross rays extend to edges of data set with projections through the cross section profiles if displayed both mouse and arrow keys can place cursor at any pixel on image Home and En
55. math operation 108 Computer requireMent cceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 Contact information cccceecceseeeeesseeteeeeeeneeenes 206 Continuous Cleans eeeeeeeeececeeeceseeeeesecateeeeeeres 90 Continuous Cleans Instruction 0 ccceee 43 92 Correction techniques cscceseeeeeseeeteeseeeneeenes 101 Cosmic Ray removal csccescesseeseeeteeeseeseeeneeenes 104 Cross sections post processing parametef serenon enrera i i a 125 Procedur Sesine eset neurir a e riin 125 Cursor CUrVE seee ferria ooreo Eae EROE EEan sa esi 77 Cursor functions CUISOL SIZE moen hentai ae 75 data displayed as graph or image seers 75 Custom ChIp oo ree a a 39 153 Custom Filter post processing PALAMELELS 6 c55ciegecsounccsteccestavscaecdseecutetevaceesstevesnes 118 PLOCCCUIC eaii enesenn aaner eE EE NEA eS 118 Custom Timing s eeeeseeeesseseeseesererssreressrseessee 39 154 Custom Toolbar adding a button s sesseeseesesseeessrserseesersessreeessese 150 CUSTOMIZATION Of 0 eee ceceesseeseeeeeeseeeseeteeeteenseees 149 ISP lay sess fesr E Steen eins tatiatiets 149 removing a button 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeteees 150 SCttIN GS seit Hose a a E ss ati eee E 149 CUSTOMEL SUP POM Tare porrie nen e r a Re eE 206 208 WinView 32 Manual D Dark chatee occ tevesceiesteciecsneieesticesits ncdicseioenivacts 102 Data collection Initial 0 cc eeeeeeeseeseereeeteeeeeees 45 E
56. of Defining and Storing ROIs A region of interest full width or partial width can be defined by 1 Entering values for the Pixels X and Strips Y parameters from the keyboard 2 Dragging the mouse cursor on a displayed image to define a rectangular region and then clicking the Mouse button Before using this method you must acquire a Full Chip image Otherwise you will get a Size of Image in Active Window is Incompatible with Current Chip Size message when you try to define an ROI 3 Defining the region with the mouse and then changing parameter values via the keyboard before storing the pattern This allows you to change a full width ROI created by mouse selection to a partial width ROI like the one in Figure 91 After an ROI is defined its pattern can be stored edited or deleted All defined areas will be indicated on the displayed image after they have been stored If a pattern is being edited its outline will be green and all other patterns will have red outlines Purple outlines will be drawn if two or more patterns are defined that do not have identical X Start and End points these outlines represent additional data that will be included in the image acquired using the ROI Setup The display of defined regions of interest is automatically updated when patterns are added or cleared Stored patterns are save to disk when you exit the WinView 32 and are automatically loaded the next time you start the program Chapter 8 N
57. of the product or part all invoices must be paid in full in accordance with the terms of sale Failure to pay invoices when due may result in the interruption and or cancellation of your one 1 year limited warranty and or any other warranty expressed or implied All warranty service must be made by the Princeton Instruments factory or at our option an authorized service center Before products or parts can be returned for service you must contact the Princeton Instruments factory and receive a return authorization number RMA Products or parts returned for service without a return authorization evidenced by an RMA will be sent back freight collect These warranties are effective only if purchased from the Princeton Instruments factory or one of our authorized manufacturer s representatives or distributors Unless specified in the original purchase agreement Princeton Instruments is not responsible for installation setup or disassembly at the customer s location Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited above and do not extend to any product or part which has e been lost or discarded by you e been damaged as a result of misuse improper installation faulty or inadequate maintenance or failure to follow instructions furnished by us e had serial numbers removed altered defaced or rendered illegible e been subjected to improper or unauthorized repair or e been damaged due to fire floo
58. on Run Alternatively if you already have an image open this image and display it on screen 2 Next click on the Use Region of Interest radio button Main tab page Then click on the ROI Setup tab to display the ROI Setup tab page If there are already regions stored you will now see them displayed as rectangles on the displayed image 3 Click on the spin button to the right of the New Edit Pattern field until the field label says New Pattern instead of Edit Pattern 4 Use the mouse to drag an ROI box over the desired region in the image display 5 Click on Mouse ROI tab page to enter the ROI information Once this information is displayed on the tab page you edit it 6 Click on Store to save the new pattern Chapter 9 Correction Techniques Introduction Advanced data collection includes background subtraction flatfield correction CCD blemishes removal and Cosmic Ray removal The skillful use of these techniques can significantly enhance measurement capabilities Note that not all of these techniques will be available in early releases of the software Background Subtraction Princeton Instruments systems are adjusted so that data have a small offset This offset assures that small signals won t be missed This offset can be subtracted after the signal is acquired to prevent it from having any influence on the data Background subtraction allows you to automatically subtract any constant background in your signal
59. process you will be given the choice of AUTO PCI or Custom installation AUTO PCI Installs the WinView 32 application and DLLs the help files the INF file if required and the interface drivers sample data diagnostic programs Acton spectrograph support pulser support ASCII and Move Snap Ins PI Screen Saver PI SPE Shell Extension Visual Basic Interface and the Imaging option Custom By default installs the WinView 32 application and DLLs the help files sample data PI Screen Saver and the PI SPE Shell Extension However you can change the components for installation by checking and unchecking the boxes associated with the components Installing from the CD 1 Exit any software currently running This will speed the installation of WinView 32 2 Insert the WinView 32 CD into your CD drive Windows will detect the CD and the installation will begin automatically Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinView 32 21 Note If the auto start feature has been disabled on your computer click the desktop Start button select Run key x Setup where x is the letter designating your CD drive and press the Enter key on your keyboard The install sequence will begin Caution If your CD drive doesn t support the Windows long filenames attempting the installation causes the filenames to be truncated and the installation fails generating an error message like An error occurred during the move data process 113 Component Appli
60. products for a period of one 1 year after shipment See additional Limited One 1 year Warranty terms and conditions above which apply to this warranty Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty X Ray Detector Limited One Year Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants with the exception of CCD imaging device and fiber optic assembly damage due to X rays which carry NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED all X ray products for one 1 year after shipment See additional Basic Limited One 1 year Warranty terms and conditions above which apply to this warranty Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Software Limited Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants all of our manufactured software discs to be free from substantial defects in materials and or workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from shipment Princeton Instruments does not warrant that the function of the software will meet your requirements or that operation will be uninterrupted or error free You assume responsibility for selecting the software to achieve your intended results and for the use and results obtained from the software In addition during the one 1 year limited warranty The original purchaser is entitled to receive free version upgrades Version upgrades supplied free of charge will be in the form of a download from the In
61. selected file to open the File Operations menu Then click on Delete to delete all of the selected files Chapter 5 Displaying the Data Introduction WinView 32 can display data as an image as a two dimensional graph or as a 3D Graph multiple strips from the same graph or the same strip from multiple frames You can choose to allow the software control how the data will be displayed or make the selection yourself To have WinView 32 control the data display mode simply select the Auto Select check box provided on the File Open dialog box and also on the Display Layout dialog box The Auto Select algorithm makes the selection depending on the number of data strips as follows If there are eleven or more strips of data they will be displayed as a normal image such as that shown in Figure 43 256strip SPE 1024 X 256 X 1 of x 4 0 9 Q 4 jaa Me 2 250 21 40 Figure 43 Image Display of 256 Data Strips Ifthere are at least three data strips but less than eleven the data will be plotted as a 3D Graph as shown in Figure 44 10strip SPE 1024 X 10 X 1 5 x j a Resan ei 1 Ee Figure 44 3D Image Display of 10 Data Strips 61 62 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 If there are only two strips of data they will be displayed as graphs stacked in a two dimensional plot the same as for a 3D Graph of two strips v 2strip SPE 1024 X 2X 1 Figure 45 3D Graph with Two Data S
62. slightly smaller than the virtual chip dimensions Part 3 Reference Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature cccceeee 163 Appendix B Data Structure ccc cicccsccsecsccccssectescsets secs caassnscsestsecessessenesones 171 Appendix C CD ROM Failure Workarounds ccceceeceeeeeees 181 Appendix D WinView 32 Repair and Maintenance cee 183 Appendix E USB 2 0 Limitations 200 0000 cceeseceeteeeesseeeeneeeens 187 Appendix F Troubleshooting USB 2 0 oo ccc cssceeeeeseeeeteeeens 189 Appendix G Glossary cco s seis ceccctes wiecntse Reem decent ote atend icecenredeeaoacens 201 161 162 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This page intentionally left blank Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature System Controller Type and Camera Type Cross Reference Use the cross reference table below if you need to determine the controller type and or camera CCD type used by your system This table is based on the Princeton Instruments brand systems that are currently being sold by Roper Scientific Inc Many of these systems incorporate non volatile RAM NVRAM that has been factory programmed with the default hardware setup parameters for the controller camera and CCD array included in your system If you know the controller type used by your system you should be able to download these default parameters However if this functionality is not available for your system you w
63. the Minimum threshold is ON and data is being acquired any intensity value below the set value will return a 0 Intensities higher than the Minimum setting will return a 1 unless they also exceed the Maximum setting in which case they will return a 0 When the Minimum threshold is OFF all intensities below the Maximum will return a 1 intensities that exceed Maximum return 0 Enable Maximum The check box allows the Maximum threshold function to be switched ON checked or OFF unchecked When the function is ON you can enter the maximum threshold level This can be any positive or negative value in the range of possible intensities provided the setting is higher than the Minimum setting This setting will be retained when the function is switched OFF When the Maximum threshold is ON and data is being acquired any intensity value above the set value will return a 0 When it is OFF all intensities higher than the Minimum will return a 1 Note Background subtraction can force negative values Procedure 1 Select On Line Thresholding on the Experiment Setup Processes tab page The Online Thresholding Setup dialog box will open Set the Minimum and Maximum threshold enable status and set the threshold values Click on OK to save your entries and close the dialog Then click on Acquire or Focus to initiate data acquisition ASCII Output File Description The ASCII Output process allows you to select and set parameters for sa
64. the Save button to save the entered information _ Acauisiion Display Tools and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box Experiment Setup 11 Click on OK This will close the Experiment Setup aint dialog box Video Focus sags Hardware Ws 12 Once again click on Acquisition in the Menu bar Again Emcee FING the Acquisition menu will appear as shown in Figure 33 Ae Acquire Background Acquire Flat Field Video Figure 33 Acquisition menu Data Collection Procedures Controller Specific ST 133 Controller The procedure that follows for these controllers is in two parts Video Focusing and Data Collection In focusing images are displayed on the video monitor not the computer monitor and no data is collected This allows rapid and easy adjustment of the system optics Once the settings have been optimized data collection begun can begin Focusin This procedure applies for a system that includes an ST 133 Controller and a video monitor connected to the Video port BNC connector on the controller If your system does not include a video monitor go to the Data Collection All Controllers section which begins on page 54 1 Select Video from the Acquisition menu This will allow live data to be displayed on your video monitor 2 Select Video Focus from the Acquisition Menu The Interactive Camera dialog box BEE EO Figure 34 will open 1 000 _ Seconds EA Vie is rre 3 Click on the RUN bu
65. the hard drive Copy the files to the customer s hard drive from the customer s CD ROM then fix the names of the files that were truncated There are only 7 files that are not DOS compatible 8 3 so this at most a 10 minute job Here are their abbreviated and full filenames Not all of these files are used in the standard installation but all are present on the CD e CLSSNA 1 CLS rename to clsSnapIn cls e PIXCMT 1 DLL rename to PEXCMTXT32 dll e WINX R 1 DOC rename to WinX_readme doc e WINX32 1 BAS rename to Winx32Test bas e WINX32 1 DOC rename to Winx32 Automation VB Version doc e WINX32 1 FRM rename to Winx32Test frm e WINX32 1 FRX rename to Winx32Test frx 181 182 WinView 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 Appendix D WinView 32 Repair and Maintenance Note When WinView 32 is installed it modifies the Windows Registry file If for any reason you reinstall Windows the Registry file may be replaced and WinView 32 may not run correctly Reinstall WinView 32 to correct this problem Install Uninstall WinView 32 Components at a Later Time After you have installed WinView 32 you may want to install additional WinView 32 files or to uninstall selected files To do so 1 Start the installation program and on the WinSpec WinView WinXTest Selection dialog box Figure 154 select Install WinView 32 for Windows Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific In
66. the label will be lost In fact once the label is on the display it cannot be edited However if it has been saved it can be edited as follows Erase labels Call up the display label menu Load the label Edit the label in the edit box Check the Save Label box to save the changes 6 Click OK to print the corrected label Oe E i T Labels are printed with the same font as is used for the axes To change fonts use the Display Layout Axes dialog and select Fonts this works even if axes are not displayed To reposition the label move or resize the ROI and Edit box before you click on OK Moving the box however requires that you position the mouse very near the edge of the box because further in the Edit box will capture the mouse Resizing is done in the usual way with the ROI box handles If the ROI box is accidentally erased just redraw a new one in the desired location and the Edit box will reappear The Edit box wraps lines at the end of the box and the Label function will display the label as it appears in the box Figure 58 Figure 58 Edit box with Line wrapped Label and Finished Label To correct the line wrapping simply resize the ROI as shown in Figure 59 LLLLLLLILLLLLLLLLLLLLILLLLEJILLLLL PEPE PEL SEP EEEEE A FSH jA label that is too long for the edit box H A label that is too long forthe edit box CLELELLLLLELEEEEEEEEEE ELLE EEE EEEEEEEELES SEEEEEEEEEEE EEE EEEE EEE EEE EEE EE EE EEE
67. using the Customize Toolbar dialog box Figure 147 Buttons can be added or removed at any time and the new configuration will be saved when the dialog box is closed Customize Toolbar 2 x Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons Close EJE Trigger Go cioss Sections On Off Reset Mela Pulse Waxes Onsott Help 1 Pellet Box On Oft VETI Setup Pulser Meye Up Hoel Pl Max To Gate F eve a ae Size nove PI Max To Shutter noe Pl Max To Safe gt J Figure 147 Customize Toolbar dialog box 149 150 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 E an Available Button Open the Customize Toolbar dialog by clicking on Custom Toolbar in the Setup menu 2 Referring to Figure 147 note that the buttons available for placement on the Custom Toolbar are listed on the left Buttons already on the toolbar are on the right 3 To add an available button to the Custom Toolbar first select it from the left hand list You may have to scroll through the list of available buttons to find the one you want You can choose where to place the button by selecting a button on the right side which will then be highlighted The new button will be placed before the highlighted one 4 Click on the Add button The button will disappear from the list of Available buttons and will be added to the list of Toolbar buttons 5 Click on Close to close the dialog box Removing a Button 1 Open the Customize Toolbar dialog by c
68. will be warned that the vemte je Ernai F Aitosetet specified file name is already in use If not checked the old data file will be IV Contin before overwriting overwritten by the new one No warning j Auto saveand prompts is provided Dont auto save or ask to save Data Type AutoSelect Should be T Use anew window for each run selected Acquire Focus Cancel Help Auto save and prompts Select Don t auto save or ask to save With this Figure 31 Data File dialog box selection you won t receive a prompt when a file is closed as a result of starting a data collection A prompt will still be issued if you close the file explicitly and it has not been saved since being collected Use a New Window for each run Leave unchecked 9 Click on the button to the Run As Data File Name 2 x right of the Name field Saem adt dence This will open a browse 256str ip YT SPE box Select the directory 1035strip SPE By 2strip SF where you want the stored 1Omorestrip SPE BS 3001 SPI file to go In Figure 32 the 10strip SPE EL 3sttip SF file name testfile will be 16strip SPE fe drames 1strip SPE By adjust 5 used and the file will be stored in a directory named wj Data The file type should s be WinX Data spe File name frestfte Savevas type winx Data spe T Earca Figure 32 File Browse dialog box Chapter 3 Initial Data Collection 51 10 Click on
69. 0 assume 1 left x start value right x value amount x is binned grouped in hw top y start value bottom y value amount y is binned grouped in hw 178 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 ROITinfoblk ROIMAX ROI Starting Offsets ROD T S 2512 ROI 2 1524 ROI 3 1536 ROI 4 1548 ROI 5 1560 ROT 6 Sy 2572 ROI 7 1584 ROI 8 1596 ROI 9 1608 ROI 10 1620 char FlatField HDRNAMEMAX 1632 Flat field file name char background HDRNAMEMAX 1752 background sub file name char blemish HDRNAMEMAX 1872 blemish file name float file header_ver 1992 version of this file header char YT_Info 1000 1996 2995 Reserved for YT information long WinView_id 2996 0x01234567L if file created by Winx Calibration Structures There are three structures for the calibrations e The Area Inside the Calibration Structure below is repeated two times xcalibration 3000 3488 x axis calibration ycalibration 3489 3977 y axis calibration E7 Start of X Calibration Structure 3000 3488 double offset 3000 offset for absolute data scaling double factor 3008 factor for absolute data scaling char current_unit 3016 selected scaling unit char reserved1 3017 reserved char string 40 3018 special string for scaling char reserved2 40 3058 reserved char calib_valid 3098 flag if calibration is valid char input_unit 3099 current input units for calib_value char polynom_unit 3100 linear UNIT a
70. 128 Mb if it is currently 64 Mb click on OK and close WinView 4 Reboot your computer 5 Restart WinView and begin acquiring data or focusing If you see the message again increase the DMA buffer size Data Overrun Has Occurred message Because of memory constraints and the way that USB transfers data a Data overrun has occurred message may be displayed during data acquisition If this message is displayed take one or more of the following actions 1 Minimize the number of programs running in the background while you are acquiring data with WinView 32 Run data acquisition in Safe Mode Add memory Use binning Increase the exposure time Defragment the hard disk Update the Orange Micro USB2 driver See OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update page 197 BAO Se EO If the problem persists your application may be USB 2 0 bus limited Since the host computer controls the USB 2 0 bus there may be situations where the host computer interrupts the USB 2 0 port In most cases the interrupt will go unnoticed by the user However there are some instances when the data overrun cannot be overcome because USB 2 0 bus limitations combined with long data acquisition times and or large data sets increase the possibility of an interrupt while data is being acquired If your experiment requirements include long data acquisition times and or large data sets your application may not be suitable for the USB 2 0 interface Therefore we rec
71. 34 PG200 Triggers tab Page ccistecschessasseesheelazessssascertesszenvuansandeeaeazcegohavstaveanss 134 PG200 Gating tab p l nn nnen E a A A S 135 Repetitive Gating Setup dialog DOX ccccescccsseceteceteceteceseceeeeeeeeeseeeeseennes 135 Sequential Gating Setup dialog DOX 0 0 eeceesceeseescseeteeeneeeseeeseeenseeneeeseens 136 Camera State dialog DOX ccccecccssscesscseeceeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseecsaecsaeeaeseaeenaeens 137 Pulse rs dialo bOx negnn a E ulate E see aes 137 PTG Triggers tab Page mne tases tletetitais estates a a a a E dans 137 PTG Gating tab page reeni neo ier AE EEE A a n 138 Repetitive Gating Setup c ccccccscccssecssecstecetecetecsseeeeecseeeseeeeeaeseseeeeeeneeeaaes 138 Sequential Gating Setup DX cececccesesssceesceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseecsaeenseenseenseen 138 Camera State dialog DOX cccesccescessceeeesseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseecseecsaecsaeenaeenseenseens 140 DG535 dial OS DOK es ieescceee ub ccnsceenivocheeng as e E E E E EE 140 DG535 Comm Port tab page cccccccssccssecsteceseceseceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseesseeeteeeaaes 141 DG535 Triggers tab page vcs syccssidoat nea a a a iS 141 DG535 Gating tab pages crestina ea ae ea andie ank 142 Repetitive Gating Set psrncrrie n n e e i a e i aae 142 Sequential Gating Setup dialog DOX ceeceecceesceeseeeneeeneeeseeesseeseeneenseens 142 Range Limits Exceeded Warning cccccecssecssecsteceteceeceeeeseeeseesseeeeeesaes 144 Gate Width Delay Sequence
72. 55 Saving Data Files seridneri idae a a a aaae a en a a Ea E ta dese 58 Closing a Data File 2 cisc svecerars eee Ea AE EETA E EEEE E EET EERE 59 Deleting Data Piles in a a a a A E a e a Ti 60 Chapter 5 Displaying the Data cccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 61 TAO MUCHO as ees ates ca acess Poe Baa teats Sassen E Got shen E ead a ts dees taal fash A A ites 61 Sereen Refresh Rate eioan earn outed sectarian sos ceuesseevetes son E E aa 62 Data Displayed as an Image ceeccecccccsseesseeseeesceesceeseecaecesecesecseceseeeseeeseecseecssecssecnseenaeee 62 iv WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Data Window Context Menu ccccccccccecsseessecsteceecesecsseeeeeeseeeseseeeseeeseeeseecaaecssecssecnseseaeens 66 Labeling Images and Graphs ceccccccecsseesseceeceseceseceseeeecseeceseeeeaeeeseecssecsaecaaecaecnseenaeee 66 Data Displayed as a 3D Graph ecceccccsseesseesceesseessecesecesecesecnseeeeeseeeeeseceseeeseeeeeeseenaeen 70 Changing the Color of the Axes and Labels 0 cccccccsccssscessceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeessenseenseenseenes 81 Part 2 Advanced TODics cccsssccceesseeeeseeeeeneeeeenseeeeeeees OO Chapter 6 On Line Data Acquisition Processes cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 TAT OCUCELON sacahzestvosccsvest a eeoa bata cyaeatd af rE dees a EPE 85 On Line Thresholding ccccccesccesscsseceseceesceeeeeeceeeseeeseeescecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeceseessecseeeseeeeeneesgs 85 ASCH Output
73. AN AR NNNNA Mia ad Setup File Opens the Sequence Values File dialog box Figure 144 which enables the following Figure 143 Gate Width Delay Sequence dialog box Sequence Values File xi Ask Before Overwriting If checked you will be queried before a new sequence value file overwrites an W Ask Before Dverwnting Notify When File Has Geen Saved existing one If unchecked overwriting pp Use Default File Name Experiment File Name _PD W can occur without warning Notify When File Has Been Saved The file is saved at the end of the data acquisition run You will be notified that this has occurred if this box is checked Figure 144 Sequence Values File Use Default File Name If checked dialog box sequence value file name will be experiment file name but with the extension PDW If unchecked you must enter the name in the Name field Name If not using the default name for the sequence value file enter the file name in the provided field The button at the end of the box opens a browser to facilitate assigning the file location On CCD Accumulations Sets the number of gates to occur during an exposure Software Accumulations Sets the number of exposures to be taken for each Shot Note that the number of Accumulations set here must be the same as the value set on the Experiment Setup Main tab page for proper operation Chapter 14 Pulser Operation 147 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup
74. B USB 2 0 Host Controller installed for the SIIG card should be replaced by the appropriate Microsoft driver Windows 2000 or Windows XP depending on the laptop s operating system Note This procedure may also be performed for desktop computers that use the Orange Micro 70USB90011 USB2 0 PCI l DNs A eS Download and install Microsoft Service Pack 4 for Windows 2000 or Service Pack 1 for Windows XP if the service pack has not been installed From the Windows Start menu select Settings Control Panel Select System and then System Properties Select the Hardware tab and click on Device Manager button Expand Universal Serial Bus Controllers Right mouse click on OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Host Controller and select Properties On the Driver tab click on the Update Driver button You may have to wait a minute or so before you will be allowed to click on the button When the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard appears click on Next Select the Search for a suitable driver radio button On the next screen select the Specify a location checkbox Browse and select the location Click on OK In the Driver Files Search Results window check the Install one of the other drivers check box Select the NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller B1 driver Click on Next and the installation will take place When the Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears click on Finish You will then be given the choice of rest
75. CD Setup dialog DOX cccccccescceteceteceseceeeeeeeeeseeeeneenaes 35 Controller Camera tab page left 2 5 19 0 and earlier right 2 5 19 6 and laterna a a e e a ve date n e a a veces choses 36 Display tab page left graphic applies to all controllers except ST 121 right graphic applies to ST 121 only woo cece eccecsseessecsteceeceseseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeaees 40 Interface tab page ccccecccesscesscesceeseeeseecssecsseceaeceseceseceseeseeeseeeseseseaeeeaeeesaeenaes 41 Cleans Skips tab pagesen ireti aera e a E a EER EE 42 Vertical SKPS a na a a ea A EA EAEn E Ta E ER EEEa 44 Temperature dialog bokar nren a E a Taai 46 Experiment Setup Main tab page left all but PI MAX right PI MAX 47 Timing tab page eeto ieee ri ce satsvheesty ite ebeseuderiva dacs cancuadaraviaers cha ecten des 48 Data Corrections tab page ccccccceccsessseesseessecsceeseecnsecesecnseceseesseeeeeeeeeeeeneenaes 49 Generic ADG tab pagerar n a i a lea a S ys 49 Data File dialog bOX cccecccecsseesseesceesceessecesecescecseecsaecsecnseceaecsaeeseeeseeeeeneennes 50 File Browse dialog BOX secs ccageseredaiuenicnasandvecedi oa tis cess vice bavaeeat EEE 50 ACGUISILION Menere ase n i a e E a E A a aea 51 ST 133 Interactive Camera dialog DOX cccceccceesceeseesseeeseeesseeseeeseeneenseens 51 PentaMAX Interactive Operation dialog bOX s ssessssesssessseseesesersessrsesersesss 53 Typical Data Acquisition Image cccccccecssessecesecesscee
76. DGS535 is programmed via the IEEE 488 GPIB port of the computer default GPIB address is 15 The choices provided by the tab pages are the same ones that are available using the DG535 front panel Basic DG535 operation is reviewed in the following procedure The individual tab page selections are discussed in detail in the online Help topics Note The DG535 is used to control the Camera State x PI MAX gate functions If the system is Camera Has Been Set To Sate Mode equipped with a PI MAX camera the Camera Select The Desied Acton State dialog box Figure 135 will appear when the software is started Although the software always initially places the PI MAX in Safe C Restore To Last Setting mode you have the option of restarting with the last setting Shutter Mode or Gate Mode Figure 135 Camera State dialog box I Make sure the DG535 is connected to the computer s TER Gating Comm Pest IEEE 488 GPIB port Later you will tell WinView 32 the fe ipa gaor hoda 7 DG535 s GPIB address The intemal E H Hz default setting is 15 2 Following all intensifier i ie 5 S precautions listed in the hardware manuals turn on the Slope petairetal DG535 and wait for it to Ctwema Ponty Aah initialize If the DG535 isn t eaatrye 50 hii turned on the WinView 32 software won t be able to program it 3 Select Setup and then Pulsers to open the Pulsers Cancel D
77. Demo provides limited access to WinView functions and allows you to display previously acquired data and to use post processing techniques to analyze it After you have selected the interface click on Next to open the Controller Type dialog box 4 Controller Selection Note The Controller Type Controller Type for PVCAM supported cameras is automatically determined from the entry in the PVCAM INI file For Princeton Instruments cameras using the TAXI PCI Cancel Help interface with the exception of the PhotonMAX the wizard Figure 19 Controller Type dialog box checks to see if NVRAM is installed in the controller or camera NVRAM contains detailed information about your system s controller and camera Note that some controllers and cameras do not contain NVRAM so you will have to select the appropriate entries See Appendix A for a cross reference table for systems controllers and CCD arrays If the wizard finds NVRAM the wizard reads the controller and camera information and inserts that information into the Controller Type and Detector Camera CCD dialog boxes If it does not find NVRAM it enters ST 133 as the default controller If you have an ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 controller you will have to select it from the dropdown list The Controller Type selection is critical because it determines the nature and type of the other selections that will be available including the camera type display orientation
78. Experiment Setup Data Corrections tab page see Figure 96 101 102 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Setting Automatic Background Subtraction These steps instruct the software to automatically subtract a previously stored background file from ACO EN erase Rena each new data acquisition Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Conections 1 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition Arithmetic menu or click on the button on the Custom F d Bkand jar Toolbar This will open the Experiment DAA Setup dialog box Flatied Fares irj 2 Click on the Data Corrections tab The Data EEAO Corrections tab page will be selected EEE Bitte Esni Helana Figure 96 pie SOFA Temporal 3 Click on the Background checkbox to turn on Seni Bled ere background subtraction Type in the name ofa p N a background file if it is in the current directory l TEE Alternatively click on the button at the end of the entry window to open the file browser to select the background file if it is in a different Fake Plat Conce Hass directory 4 Once the Background filename has been Figure 96 Data Corrections tab page entered click on the OK button This saves the background filename for all future data acquisitions or until the Background is turned off Spatial The filename entered in the Background box will be subtracted from each new file before it is displayed or stored If both Flatfield and Background ar
79. Fj E e aa ara ae O E E E EA N ans 86 Chapter 7 Gleanings sri css tector see geet pane eet Sees cai cress 89 Nirod O a efi saveet asad aA a a a he tone A atoet Seas ea aon ei ag 89 Clean Cycle Sareren ee ireira e E E Svs shun REE cdot si evan E E ipeenkes 89 Comtinuolis Cleans sists snang era e aTe a a A a A Ae Eae ES 90 Continuous Cleans Instruction ceeeccesccsceeseeececeeseesecaecaeeeeceaecaeeeneeeecaaeeaeeeceaeeaeeeeeeaes 92 ROIs and ROT o i oTe 92 Kinetics and Cleaning soricei a a a e e Meee du laevis dee 92 Chapter 8 ROI Definition amp Binmning ccccccccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 OVETVICW ese ied E EAEE SASE E E AEE e EE A ENAA 95 Binning Group and Height parameters c ccsccesscsssceesceeeceeseeeseeeseecseecsaeesecnseenseeeaeens 96 Defining ROIS EE E T 97 Chapter 9 Correction Techniques ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 IMUTOCUCEION secsnateiyssetstveessteouts oss ae A a E enacteansnesteanotsasentontscsesanestabnasseesmecs 101 Background Subtraction oieri eroaren asen i ai canedsaatiedesyee Godealtes 101 Fla eld COET O a a a santos E a NE aS enana 103 CCD Blemishes ses caesec cai sees e e a a a E E e a E a eh 104 Cosme Ray Removal a a a tats a aa e RA EE E E EEEE ARTS 104 Chapter 10 Image Math nsnnsssnunnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 105 Tinto CEI ON rye cad eea a aa aieeaa E pak gang EE E AE aT 105 Source Data and Destinati
80. I and if the mouse is right clicked in the ROI the context menu changes to that shown in Figure 53 Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 67 X1X1 Jnnnnnnnnanannennnnenhs Autoscale Auto 5 95 Zoom In Label Display Erase Labels Close ROI we lt BUSEE TEEN EEN PL SEEDER BREEDER TORE SEEREEBEEEN Or gt Reenter l AN Maf MA an Wn A I Ay VATT T May yw y ky j Vin N E N Figure 53 ROI Context menu If the mouse is right clicked outside the ROI the normal menu Figure 52 appears The ROI context menu Figure 53 contains the usual actions pertaining to the ROI autoscaling on the region inside the ROI and zooming in to the ROI region plus three new actions Label Display which allows user labels to be placed on the display Erase Labels which removes ALL user labels from the display and Close ROI which erases the ROI with no other action it doesn t move the cursor The Label Display action brings up a dialog box and opens an Edit box Inside the ROI as shown in Figure 54 Load Load File comment number E F Save Label in File comment number i Cancel I Remove existing labels Settings Help Figure 54 Label Display action 68 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 The dialog box allows loading a previously saved label from one on the SPE file s 5 comment fields alternatively you can type the label into the edit box The label can be saved into a file s c
81. Imax gets mapped the output value of the last In Out pair Any input value not specified in an In Out pair is mapped to zero Imin Imax Imin Imax represents inclusive input range to be remapped Ifirst Ofirst Ofirst is the output value for Ifirst and for any intensity lt Imin 1 0 I is the input value and O is the output value 1 0 O3 is the output value for 13 1 0 O4 is the output value for 14 Ilast Olast Olast is the output value for Ilast and for any intensity gt Imax Example The following is a custom mapping As stated previously the entries after Imin and Imax represent are input output levels Imin and Imax are 3 and 7 respectively Everything less than 3 gets mapped to 13 the first In Out mapping Everything greater than 7 gets mapped to 12 the last In Out mapping Since input values 3 and 4 are not represented in an In Out pair these intensities will be mapped to 0 3 7 6 13 5 11 7 12 References To explore in further detail the theory and techniques of digital image processing we suggest the following texts 1 Digital Image Processing Gregory A Baxes Cascade Press Denver CO 1984 ISBN 0 945591 00 4 2 Digital Image Processing R C Gonzalez P Wintz Addison Wesley Reading MA 1977 ISBN 0 201 11026 1 3 Digital Picture Processing A Rosenfeld A C Kak Vol 1 amp 2 Academic Press New York 1982 ISBN Vol 1 0 12 1597 301 2 ISBN Vol 2 0 12 597 302 0 4 Digital Image Processing W
82. K Pratt John Wiley New York 1978 ISBN 0 471 01888 0 122 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 12 Additional Post Acquisition Processes Introduction The processes included in this chapter are accessible from Processes menu These processes all use the same Input and Output tab pages but have unique Parameters tab pages Since the Input and Output functionality is identical for all of these processes the Input and Output tab pages are described below The Parameters tab pages are described in the appropriate sections Input tab page The Input tab page Figure 113 selects the data to be operated on You can specify the data file the frames within the file and the X and Y range on the CCD The input data type is reported Note that the Mouse button at the bottom of the window allows you to use the mouse to specify the region to be processed Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region The Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected Threshold and Clipping Threshold and Clipping Input Parameters Output Input Parameters Output pale OutputlImage Circuit spe ES ka DADatas Frame j Aia Besut po r r l i jtol 15 Range y age F D i aT eee n efs l 1 ta 268 Fi po a Y Rang
83. Number of scans Early Winx Number of Accumulations Experiment readout time T F Triggered Timing Option Version of SW creating this file newl20 Type II 2 010120 Type I 3 s STLI30 40S STLQT B ST138 6 DC131 PentaMax 7 ST133 MicroMax SpectroMax 8 ST135 GPIB 9 VICED 10 ST116 GPIB 11 OMA3 GPIB 12 OMA4 1 if flat field was applied Kinetics Trigger Mode Data label Name of Pulser File with Pulse Widths Delays for Z Slice Name of Absorbance File if File Mode Number of Times experiment repeated Number of Time experiment accumulated Set to 1 if this file contains YT data Vert Clock Speed in micro sec set to 1 if accum done by Hardware set to 1 if store sync used set to 1 if blemish removal applied set to 1 if cosmic ray removal applied if cosmic ray applied this is type Threshold of cosmic ray removal number of frames in file max intensity of data future min intensity of data future y axis label shutter type shutter compensation time readout mode full kinetics etc window size for kinetics only clock speed for kinetics amp frame transfer computer interface isa taxi pci eisa etc May be more than the 10 allowed in this header if 0 assume 1 if multiple controller system will have controller number data came from This is a future item Which software package created this file number of ROIs used if
84. Post Acquisition Mask Processes ccccceeseeseteeeees 111 Chapter 12 Additional Post Acquisition Processes cce 123 Chapter 13 Printing pociutics chris etait tt ties ate Ae ss cat el Mics adiaaiouas 129 Chapter 14 Pulser Operation 0 0 0 0 ccc cesececseeeecssesecsesseeeesseeeeseeseens 133 Chapter 15 Custom Toolbar Settings 0ccc cece csseseeseeseeeeseeeeens 149 Chapter 16 Software Options 000 000 0000 ccc ccccscrseeecseeseeseeseesesseeeeseeseens 153 83 84 WinView 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 Chapter 6 On Line Data Acquisition Processes Introduction The Processes tab page on the Experiment Experiment Setup Setup dialog box allows you to set up and Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections activate up to two processes for automatic ADC Timing Processes Save Load processing of incoming data Process activation occurs when you select a checkbox After you click in a checkbox you can then click on the Setup button and begin entering or reviewing the parameters for the process After you have clicked on the OK button the process es will be applied to data being acquired I On Line Thresholding Semp Note The on line thresholding and absorbance I ASCII Output File Sep processes change the raw data If you want to retain raw data you may want to use a post acquisition process instead Acquire Focus
85. Princeton Instruments equipment please first read the system requirements below carefully WinView 32 s requirements differ from those of previous versions of WinView After confirming that your computer meets all hardware and software requirements install WinView 32 according to the instructions in this chapter Do not attempt to run the software until you have read Chapters 2 and 3 which discuss important hardware setup and data acquisition issues Also it is recommended that you install the Princeton Instruments interface board in your computer after installing WinView 32 but before running the software Instructions for installing the interface board are provided in your Princeton Instruments hardware manuals Note If your computer and system were purchased together from Princeton Instruments the Interface card will have been installed at the factory System Requirements The following information lists the system hardware and software requirements Hardware Requirements e Princeton Instruments camera and if required by the camera a Princeton Instruments ST series controller with either a TAXI or USB 2 0 Interface Control module for communication between controller and host computer e Host Computer TAXI Protocol e Minimum is AT compatible computer with 80486 or higher processor 50 MHz or faster Pentium or better recommended e Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI or Photometrics high speed PCI serial card Co
86. Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will close and you return to the DG535 dialog box 14 Select Bracket Pulsing On or Off Note Bracket pulsing is only useful in low duty factor gated measurements in the UV with the PI MAX camera See your PI MAX manual for detailed information 15 After you have finished setting up the parameters click on Download to DG535 This writes all of the parameter values to the DG535 16 Click on OK to close the window Note The DG535 can also be controlled interactively as data is being collected Sequential Mode Parameters Sequential Gating Setup X Gate Width Gate Delay Number of eee Start E usec z Start fi fusec z ai I End 5 5 Jusec End aor a Jusec I Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed Increment Type Fixed width Increment p usec Delay Increment E usec Fes Decay lay Desay Aimee p fe Sj View Width Delay Sequence l Save Sequence Values To File raup ryle r On CED Accumulations Software Sccumulations C Exponential aN reyes Lb ete aac PerE _ Feat Width Delay for hz Exposure s Bea ey Number of Images With an Accumulations setting of one Number of Images equals the number of exposures each of which is followed by a readout After each exposure the Gate Width and Gate Delay change as programmed before the next exposure occurs If multiple Accumulations are p
87. This includes both constant offsets caused by the amplifier system in the controller as well as time dependent but constant for a fixed integration time buildup of dark charge Some users collect a background image with the shutter open including ambient light in their background data The background subtract equation is Raw image data Background Corrected image data When background and flatfield operations are both performed background subtraction is always performed first The equation is the following Raw image data Background Flatfield Corrected image data Below are instructions for collecting and using background data files Acquiring Background Files This operation is similar to normal data acquisition 1 Use exactly the same temperature setting as will be used in data collection Wait at least 30 minutes after the camera has reached operating temperature to ensure stability 2 Set the same binning parameters ROI and Exposure 3 Select Acquire Background from the Acquisition menu This will immediately acquire a background file using the Experiment Setup parameters only the shutter will remain closed for most applications To acquire a background with the shutter open or if the Acquire Background feature is too restrictive in some other way a background file can be collected as a normal data file Once the file is collected and stored enter the filename in the Background Subtract filename box on the
88. U G TION irice naa a n E Ea aa a E REE iaaea 13 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinView 32 00 0 0 eters 17 Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup cccccccccceeecssesscsesseeseeseeeeseeeeesees 2 Chapter 3 Initial Data Collection 0 0 0 0 cc cece cseetecseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeesees 45 Chapter 4 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 0 0 00 55 Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 000 00 ccccceescseeeecseeseeseeseeeeseeeesees 61 11 12 WinView 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 Introduction This manual has been written to give new users a step by step guide to collecting storing and processing data from your Princeton Instruments system The manual is divided into the following three parts e Part 1 Getting Started is primarily intended for the first time user who is familiar with Windows based applications or for the experienced user who wants to review These chapters lead you through hardware setup experiment setup data collection file handling and data display procedures e Part 2 Advanced Topics goes on to discuss ancillary topics such as cleaning ROIs binning data correction techniques post acquisition processing printing pulser operation and customizing the toolbar These chapters are more informational and less procedural than those in Part 1 e Part 3 Reference contains appendices that provide additional useful information such as e commonly used syste
89. Vertical Skips The block size determines how quickly the region preceding and following the ROI will be traversed If the blocks are large the region will be traversed quickly but there is the possibility of overloading the shift register and causing blooming With small blocks the risk of blooming will be minimized but the time to traverse will be large WinView 32 uses an exponential algorithm to simultaneously achieve rapid traversing with minimal risk of blooming The first block specified in rows is as large as possible Each successive block is a factor of two smaller than the one preceding until the minimum block size is reached All remaining blocks are the minimum block size By making the first block as large as possible and subsequent blocks increasingly smaller the region preceding and following the region of interest is traversed as rapidly as possible while minimizing risk of the shift register saturation Minimum Block Size Sets the size in rows of the skip blocks that immediately precede the data The default value will generally give good results Number of Blocks Sets the number of binned skip blocks preceding and following the region of interest The default value will generally give good results Note The 2 D OMA array does not support vertical skips and all of the rows on the array are read out and converted before the non ROI information is discarded The default Vertical Skips settings of Minimum Block Size 2 and
90. Width and Gate Delay values need to be selected with some care in fluorescence decay experiments Typically the starting gate width will be very narrow perhaps 2 ns and the final gate width should be wider by about the ratio of the anticipated signal amplitude decrease over the course of the measurement timebase Similarly the starting gate delay has to take the various insertion delays into account and the final delay value might typically be set to a value on the order of five times the anticipated decay time of the process Amplitude This is the relative amplitude of the fast decay with respect to the slow one For example if you know that the amplitude of the fast decay signal is typically five times the amplitude of the slow decay signal you could enter 5 for the fast decay amplitude and 1 for the slow decay amplitude Keep in mind that it is the ratio that is being expressed For example there is no difference between entering fast and slow amplitude values of 5 and 1 and entering fast and slow amplitude values of 50 and 10 Note that the default values will give satisfactory results in many measurements Slow Decay Time Constant In a two species system enter the decay time of the slower of the two species Note that it is not essential that you enter a value If you have the decay time information you will get better data if the information is entered but acceptable results can be obtained in many situations by using the
91. XI RSPI PCD this option is not supported when the protocol is USB 2 0 Introduction This option is used to set the parameters for Virtual Chip operation a special fast acquisition technique that allows frame rates in excess of 100 fps to be obtained For the Virtual Chip selection be available on the WinView 32 Setup menu it is necessary that e the system is a PentaMAX or has an ST 133 Controller e the camera has a frame transfer chip such as the EEV 512 x 512 FT e the Frame Transfer readout mode is selected and e the file WXvchip opt is present in the same directory as the executable WinView 32 program The virtual chip method of data acquisition requires that the chip be masked as shown in Figure 152 Masking can be achieved by applying a mechanical or optical mask or by positioning a bright image at the ROI against a dark background on the remainder of the array In operation images are continually piped down the CCD at extraordinarily high frames per second FPS The mini frame transfer region is defined by an ROI as illustrated in Figure 152 The charge from this ROI is shifted under the frame transfer mask followed by a readout cycle of an ROI sized region under the mask Since the ROI is far from the serial register the stored image is just shifted repeatedly with the readout and the first few images collected will not contain useful data After the readout period the next frame is shifted under the mask and an
92. a argon spe flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec stepa SPE E Hiddamp spe Foot spe A Image SPE Foot2 SPE A Microbe1 spe foot3 SPE Microbe2 spe four strip SPE amp MINNEY SPE E Filename Hidlempspe ooo Files of type winx Data spe z Cancel Open Display As T Auto Select or Display Layout Figure 62 Open dialog box spe in the current directory and any subdirectories are listed in the box below the directory name The Image Graph and 3D Graph radio buttons at the bottom of the box allow you to select whether the file will be opened and displayed as an image two dimensional graph or as a 3D graph Select 3D Graph Auto Select should not be checked From the data directory select the image file called Hid lamp spe Click on the OK button A window of the appropriate dimensions should appear immediately The graph display may take a few seconds depending on the speed of the computer The initial appearance of the display may vary depending on the initial Display Layout parameter settings Select Layout on the Display menu The Display Layout dialog box will open as shown in Figure 63 Check and if necessary set the following parameter selections on each tab page General tab page Display As 3d Graph Auto Select unchecked Axes both boxes checked Default Display Layout x General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor m Display Type
93. ame and directory The file type can be changed 3 Save All Saves all open data files using the original file names and directories folders Sometimes during data collection or processing windows will be opened and display data with an lt untitled gt title These are temporary files and they must be saved to disk if you want to keep them The Save As dialog box performs this function The Save As dialog box also allows you to open a file and save it with a different name Saving Temporary Data Files The WinView 32 software allows you to work with temporary files files with names like lt untitled 1 gt To save these files or to save any file to a new filename perform the following steps 1 Select Save As from the File Save As 2x menu The Data File Save As Save in a Data x ke e ES dialog Figure 39 appears _YT SPE EL 256strip SPE 1035strip SPE 5 2strip SPE 2 Open the directory where you want the file saved Clicking on the button at the right of the Save In field opens a browser function 10morestip SPE E 300i 5PE 10strip SPE Ei 3strip SPE 16strip SPE E adjust SPE strip SPE amp Argont spe that will allow you to quickly and i easily select the target directory Filename EEE 3 Type in a name for the file Saa MOLENE a Windows 95 long file name convention applies It is not necessary to add the spe extension It will be added automatically according to the Figure 39
94. and Locations WinView Version 2 5 19 6 and later The PVCAM INI file required by a PVCAM supported camera i e Princeton Instruments camera with USB 2 0 interface a PhotonMAX a Photometrics camera or an Acton InSpectrum will automatically be created when the Camera Detection Wizard runs One of the things this file contains is the default name for the camera typically Cameral that is displayed on the Hardware Setup Controller Camera tab page Because this name is not particularly descriptive you may want to change it by editing the PVCAM INI file editing instructions are provided in Cameral or similar name on Hardware Setup dialog box on page 189 24 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 WinView Versions before 2 5 19 6 Run RSConfig exe After the drivers have been installed you will need to create a PVCAM INI file This step is required because cameras using the USB 2 0 interface are considered PVCAM cameras 1 Make sure the ST 133 or the camera if it has an internal controller is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on Run RSConfig from the Windows Start Programs PI Acton menu or from the directory where you installed WinView When the RSConfig dialog box Figure 1 appears you can change the camera name to one that is more specific or you can keep the default name Cameral When you have finished click on the Done button Note If the first camera in the list is not the Princeton Style USB2
95. and the External Sync going low Continuous cleans provides a way to get rid of the signal that accumulates on the array during that interval Chapter 7 Cleaning 91 Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close l l JE I l l l l l I I Shutter Preopen Qpen Close Open iClose Open Close l l jia ii l l l l NOT SCAN l l Read l Read l Read l l l l i i rod Io l i i I l I negative polarity shown rot od I f l l itwit texp ite tR l l l l Firstwait Data Second wait Data Third wait Data l and exposure stored and exposure stored and exposure stored Figure 86 External Sync Timing Diagram Shutter Normal Shutter Preopen NOT SCAN SEN Read ke Read ks Read External Sync negative polarity shown Open Open tw A texp First wait i and exposure stored and exposure stored and exposure stored Close Close te tR Data Open Open Second wait Close Close i Data Open l Open Third wait Figure 87 External Sync with Continuous Cleans Timing Diagram Close Close Data Figure 87 shows the same timing diagram with the addition of continuous cleans indicated by the shaded areas labeled CC Continuous cleans are additional clean cycles and defined by the same parameter values as the standard clean cycles When the External Sync trigger arrives during contin
96. arately Appendix E USB 2 0 Limitations The following information covers the currently known limitations associated with operating under the USB 2 0 interface e Maximum cable length is 5 meters 16 4 feet e MHz is currently the upper digitization rate limit for the ST 133 Controller e Large data sets and or long acquisition times may be subject to data overrun because of host computer interrupts during data acquisition e USB 2 0 is not supported by the Princeton Instruments PC Interface Library Easy DLLS e Some WinView WinSpec 2 5 X features are not fully supported with USB 2 0 See the table below Supported with USB 2 0 in WinX 2 5 X DIF NO Kinetics YES WinX 2 5 18 1 Reset Camera to NVRAM NO Defaults Temperature Lock Status YES WinX 2 5 x doesn t utilize hardware lock status PTG Custom Timing WinX 2 5 18 1 Custom Chip WinX 2 5 18 1 Frames per Interrupt Online Exposure File Information Not all header info is currently available in WinX 2 5 x through PVCAM Overlapping ROIs Table 4 Features Supported under USB 2 0 continued on next page 187 188 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Supported with USB 2 0 in WinX 2 5 X Macro Record Macros recorded for non PVCAM cameras may have to be re recorded to function Table 4 Features Supported under USB 2 0 Appendix F Troubleshooting Introduction The following information is provided for troubleshooting communication erro
97. art 1 Getting Started cccssssccssssssseesesesseesssensseessenes TM DRMEROCUUIC TION 5 ec 35 oo wre aes na cet te aac EEEE aeaaea rAr aaa Saaist 13 Summary of Chapter Information c cccccesccsscseeceeeeeeseeeseeescecseecsaecseceseenseeeeeesereeeneeaes 13 Online Help ieesseccascivesteaneen scan set E Ee bak ems roca E E E EE E E E E EE 15 Tool Tips and Status Bar Messages c cccscccssecsseestecsteceeceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseecsaeessecsaeeeseenaeens 15 Additional Documentation nessies eei iE a EE a ea a ea 16 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WiINViCW 32 ccccceessseeeeeeeeteteeeeeeees 17 System Requirements secs sacvvs a r a a A E Goeseo E a a aS 17 Your System Components 0 cccccecssccssscecseeeecseceesaecseneeceeceeeaecseaeecseneeceeeeeaeeseeeseeaeeees 19 Installing Win View 32 a gitea i E E E E EEA 20 Installing the PCI Card Driver cccecccecccesseessecssecesecesecesecsseeseeeseaeeeeeeeaeeesaeeseecsaeesaeesaeens 22 Installing the USB 2 0 Card Drivet ccccccccccssccessceseceseeeeeceeneeseeeeseeeseeeseecseecsaecnaeenseenaeees 23 Changing Installed Components Repairing or Uninstalling Reinstalling WinView 32 24 Startin W IVC W132 erkene suis coe suSeeeste fe od esas duce oh as cadeea ra deve eanseucueeRi Eae 24 Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 27 ntrod ction ioa a Vers taatiads saceadees tetas a a felons a E EE 27 Basic Hardwar
98. arting the computer now or later According to the window text the hardware associated with the driver will not work until you restart the computer 198 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Program Error message Program Error Winview exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows You will need to restart the program An error log is being created Figure 169 Program Error dialog box This dialog may appear if you have tried to acquire a test image acquire data or run in focusing mode and the DMA buffer size is too small A large array for example a 2048x2048 array requires a larger setting than that for a smaller array for example a 512x512 array To correct the problem l 2 3 Click on OK Reboot WinView Note the array size on the Setup Hardware Controller CCD tab page or the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page Full Chip dimensions If your camera contains a large array such as a 2048x2048 array and the DMA buffer size 1s too small there will not be enough space in memory for the data set Open Setup Environment Environment dialog box Increase the DMA buffer size to a minimum of 32 Mb 64 Mb if it is currently 32 Mb or 128 Mb if it is currently 64 Mb click on OK and close WinView Reboot your computer Restart WinView and begin acquiring data or focusing If you see the message again increase the DMA buffer size Appendix F Troubleshooting 199 Serial violations have occu
99. asks should be anodized black to prevent reflections in the optical system and they should be 160 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 very flat These two sheets can then be slid relative to one another to achieve any rectangular shape required The sheets should be placed flat in the optical plane and their openings should be centered on the optical axis Ideally they should be able to move with an accuracy of 2 3 pixels per step 30 45 microns in the X and Y directions Consult the factory for off the shelf optical masking accessories Running the camera in Free Run mode with 0 0 msec exposure time will result in the fastest acquisition time Under these conditions the acquisition time is limited by the readout time of the ROI exposure time readout time When you return the system to Normal chip mode radio button on Virtual Chip dialog box you should also open the Experiment Setup dialog box at the ROI Setup tab card and click on the ClearAll button to clear the ROI setup downloaded for Virtual Chip operation If frame acquisition appears to be slow in Focus mode check the Frames Interrupt value on the Environment dialog box and reset the value to 1 if it is greater than 1 When processing large stacks of data you may want to use a third party scientific image processing package Due to CCD design you may see some edge artifacts when acquiring data from the entire virtual chip Crop these artifacts by defining an ROI that is
100. ay be done via an internal jumper for information on how to set the jumper contact factory Tech Support Depending on your system the following choices may appear in the drop down list Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 39 Cleaning This signal is high when an array Clean cycle is in progress and otherwise low Logic 0 Establishes a TTL logic 0 at the Logic Out connector Logic 1 Establishes a TTL logic 1 at the Logic Out connector Note LOGIC 0 and LOGIC 1 can be used to control an external device using the application software Not FT Image Shift This signal is low when a frame transfer shift is in progress and otherwise high Not Ready After a Start Acquisition command this output changes state on completion of the array cleaning cycles that precede the first exposure Initially high it goes low to mark the beginning of the first exposure In free run operation it remains low until the system is halted If a specific number of frames have been programmed it remains low until all have been taken then returns high Not Scan Reports when the controller is finished reading out the CCD array NOT SCAN is high when the CCD array is not being scanned then drops low when readout begins returning to high when the process is finished Shutter This signal is low when the shutter is closed and goes high when the shutter is activated dropping low again after the shutter closes In Gated operation SHUTTER is the correct choice an
101. bed above Chapter 10 Image Math 107 Operation Descriptions Linear Operations Circuit spe BI C Addition The A file is added pixel by pixel to the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to add a constant A Operation e fe entered on the B tab page to each pointon LINEAR NONLINEAR the A file with the results written to the C C Logit file C Subtraction C Natural Log i C Multiplication Subtraction The B file is subtracted pixel b C Division Bdh u tion The B file is subtracted pixel by F dian pixel from the A file and the results are C MIN Absolute Value written to the new file It is also possible C MAX to subtract a constant entered on the B tab pitwise BITWISE page from each point on the A file with C AND Complement the results written to the C file C OR f Exclusive OR Multiplication The A file is multiplied pixel by BINARY pixel by the B file and the results written C NoT to the C file It is also possible to multiply each pixel of the A file by a constant entered on the B tab page with the results written to the C file Figure 99 Operation tab page Division The A file is divided pixel by pixel by the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to divide each pixel of the A file by a constant entered on the B tab page with the results written to the C file MIN The A file is compared pixel
102. c Installation CD instali WinSpec 32 for Windows instali WinView 32 for Windows instal WinxTest for Windows instali winx Options for Windows BACK WExit installation CD Copyright 2004 Princeton Instruments Trenton NJ USA Figure 154 WinSpec WinView or WinXTest Selection dialog box 2 Because WinView 32 was previously installed the WinView Maintenance dialog box Figure 155 will be displayed 183 184 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 ew 32 for Windows Setur Welcome l Modify repair or remove the program iodi Figure 155 Maintenance dialog box 3 Select the Modify radio button and click on Next WinView 32 for Windows Setup Media Password Enter your password Figure 156 Media Password dialog box 4 On the Media Password dialog box enter the password and click on Next i WinView 32 for Windows Setup Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Figure 157 Select Components dialog box Appendix D WinView 32 Repair and Maintenance 185 5 On the Select Components dialog box put a check in the box for each item you want to install and uncheck the box for each item you want to uninstall 6 Then click on Next and follow the instructions on the dialog boxes 7 Click on the Finish button when the Maintenance Complete dialog box is displayed The WinSpec WinView WinXTest Install dialog box will be displayed after the changes
103. cation WinXSystem File Group WinXSystem If this should happen see Appendix C for workarounds 3 Click on the program that you want to install If you have clicked on Install WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 you will be given additional choices on the next dialog box 4 After selecting the program follow the instructions provided on the dialog boxes and continue with the installation process You can abort the installation at any time by clicking on Cancel and following the instructions Installing from the FTP Site If you aren t sure how to access the FTP site contact Princeton Instruments Customer Support Department for assistance Contact information follows Princeton Instruments 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 Customer Support E mail techsupport piacton com For customer support and service outside the United States see our web page at www piacton com An up to date list of addresses telephone numbers and e mail addresses of Roper Scientific s overseas offices and representatives is maintained on the web page 1 Log onto the FTP site and go to the Software Official Current directory 2 Execute the program WinView exe and follow the instructions on your screen You can abort the installation at any time by clicking on Cancel and following the instructions Custom Installation Choices Application Files Loads the actual WinView 32 files Help F
104. ccccccsceeseeteeseeeeees 107 Armiplitid s 41 oii i perese i EEES Basie 145 AND math operation eceesececeeseeeteeeeeesseeeeeees 108 ASCII output on line process eceeeeeeeeeeees 86 Auto Select at least three Strips ceceeceesseesceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneees 56 eleyen OF MOTE Strips ce eceeeeeteceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 IWO SIPS iinn E E ene 56 Auto Select algorithm ssesseeseeeeeseeeesersersreesrseeee 56 at least three Strips ccceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneees 61 eleven OF MOTE StLIPS ceeceseceteeeeeeneeeseeteeeeeeees 61 single StHIP oes cccssesse deeds ececdeeessebeecescndecdeetaeetcesenssh 62 WO SIDS eana ented wera inion eee 62 Auto Select Image Graph or 3D Graph 55 AUX DLY D TRIG OUT 0 eee eceececneeteeeeneeeees 134 Avalanche gain cceeccesceescceseeeeeeseeneeeneeenes 48 201 Axis labeli 8 ois ress ON e ER eee 81 Background subtraction seee 101 102 acquiring background files eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 101 AULOMALIC aiaia ein eiii iieiaeie iiae 102 Binary math operations s sesseeseeeesseeeesseserseeseese 108 Binning constraints with PCI card ou eeeeeeee 96 201 hard wale s 3 3 2 ccesheedelas ees paniiiarenein ie 96 POSLEPLOCESS ssics ccseesscseedsessivteecsentecsdoccenvaesoadevsces 126 SOINA E vires e frees ees ae es ents Sect Shade 96 Binning and Skipping POSt PFOCESSING eeceesceeeceseeeteeesecseeeeeeseeeneees 126 PLOCECUIC sie che be
105. ch information will be discarded When ROIs are used to acquire data the ROI parameter information for the first 10 ROIs is stored in the data file when that data is saved to disk You can review this information for the active data display by using the File Information functionality accessible from the File menu or from the Display Context menu Notes 1 For Flatfield Correction Background Subtraction etc the images must be exactly the same size 2 References to X and Y axes assume that the shift register is parallel to the X axis and that the data is shifted to the shift register in the Y direction See Figure 89 below lt Shift Register SMALT Pixel 1 1 lt _ X Axis 512 1 10ms exp SPE 512 X 512 X Pi E3 Q Qj X 83 Y 23 Z 1 l 204 1 512 512 512 512 x 512 CCD Figure 89 Assumed CCD Array Orientation 95 96 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Binning Group and Height parameters Overview WinView 32 allows you to define rectangular groups of pixels of any size that will be added together to create an image This process adding the data from adjacent pixels together to form a single pixel sometimes called a super pixel is called binning Separate Group parameter values can be entered in the X and Y directions for every defined parameter to give you the greatest possible flexibility in controlling the readout Although modest binning may be employed to
106. ction of the array As with full frames the defined clean cycles are used to keep charge from accumulating on the array while it is waiting for a start exposure signal and after the data has been readout of the array The specialized cleaning function for an ROI Vertical Skips is applied when the ROI is read out Vertical Skips parameters are used to shorten the readout discard time for the rows before and after the ROI Minimum Block Size sets the number of invalid rows horizontal lines of the CCD to bin before the valid data Number of Blocks sets the number of these blocks to shift and discard before going to a geometric grouping algorithm Refer to Vertical Skips on page 44 for detailed information about vertical skips and the grouping algorithm Note The 2 D OMA array does not support vertical skips and all of the rows on the array are read out and converted before the non ROI information is discarded The default Vertical Skips settings of Minimum Block Size 2 and Number of Blocks 5 while appearing to work will result in invalid data Instead you must change these settings to 1 and 256 respectively for the 2 D OMA array Kinetics and Cleaning Kinetics is a special type of operation in which most of the CCD is mechanically or optically masked leaving a small section open to light This section is then shifted under the mask very quickly The defined clean cycles are used to keep charge from accumulating on the array while it
107. ctionality and specify Existing Files AutoSelect that each new data run opens a new window on the onli before ovewting fon y display window i uto saveand prompts Ask whether to save unsaved files VV Use a new window for each run Accuit Focus Cancel Help Figure 41 Data File tab page Closing a Data File An open data window can be closed by clicking on the x box at the upper right of the window or by clicking on Close in the File menu An open data window can be removed from view by clicking on the Ef box at the upper right of the window The file will be reduced to an icon on the task bar but the data will remain loaded in RAM There may be situations where you would want to do this to reduce desktop clutter Unless you intend to expand the file for display again it is ordinarily better to actually close the file so that the RAM it is using will be freed for other use If the file hasn t been saved you will be prompted There are several ways of closing an open data window Each is described below e The x box at the upper right of the data window will close that window only e The Elbox at the upper right of the window will also remove the data window from view by reducing it to an icon on the task bar There may be situations where you would want to do this to reduce desktop clutter However the data will remain loaded in RAM reducing the memory available for data collection Unle
108. cus from the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button of the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed on the computer screen To store the most recent image click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page If you want to initiate data acquisition select Focus again To store the new data to disk repeat Step 2 This completes initial data acquisition with a PentaMAX Controller Data Collection All Controllers The following data collection procedure works for all controllers However it doesn t exercise some of the special features such as video monitor support available on certain controller models 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data Data collection can be i initiated by means of the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog box by clicking on Focus on the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button of the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed Observe the displayed data and adjust the system optics for the best possible image It may be necessary to readjust the Exposure Time Experiment Setup Main page To store the most recent image 0 5 8 4 25 click Stop Acquisition
109. d 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 On the Parameters tab page set the X and Y bin size 6 On the Parameters tab page select Average if the binned data values are to be averaged If the Average box is left unchecked the binned values will be summed 7 On the Parameters tab page set the Skip X and Y values Data points that fall in the skip zones do not contribute to the output Skip values of zero are allowable that is no points will be skipped Leftover points at the end of a strip or column are discarded 8 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 9 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 12 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 127 Restrictions and Limitations The following are some restrictions and limitations of the Binning and Skipping function e This function can resize an image down to a minimum of pixel but WinView 32 cannot display an image less than 2 x 2 pixels e May cause data overflow in the output image if the output data type is selected as integer If data to be binned will exceed 32 000 counts select Unint or Long e The maximum binning and skipping size is th
110. d radiation or other acts of God or other contingencies beyond the control of Princeton Instruments After the warranty period has expired you may contact the Princeton Instruments factory or a Princeton Instruments authorized representative for repair information and or extended warranty plans Physically damaged units or units that have been modified are not acceptable for repair in or out of warranty and will be returned as received 206 10 11 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 All warranties implied by state law or non U S laws including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are expressly limited to the duration of the limited warranties set forth above With the exception of any warranties implied by state law or non U S laws as hereby limited the forgoing warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties guarantees agreements and similar obligations of manufacturer or seller with respect to the repair or replacement of any parts In no event shall Princeton Instruments liability exceed the cost of the repair or replacement of the defective product or part This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that may vary from state to state and from country to country Some states and countries do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts when an action may be brought or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
111. d different from the background color On the Display Layout Color tab page it the Active 3D Graphs button that allows the cursor curve color to be set The Marker Graphs button is used to set the marker curves color 78 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Hidden Surfaces You may wish to shift the view to show the hidden or underside of the display as illustrated in the following procedure 1 Open the Display Layout dialog box and make the following changes Range Change Y so that the range is from 40 to 1 not from 1 to 40 3D Layout Select Show Hidden Surface and deselect Highlight Cursor Curve and Marker Curves On Remove Hidden Lines should be selected Change the Z Axis Endpoint to X 25 and Y 0 The Z Axis Endpoint can be set by entering values up to 80 X either polarity and 80 Y positive only or graphically by using the mouse If you click on Adjust Z Graphically and then on OK the Z Axis Adjust window will appear Position the cursor in the window depress the left mouse button and drag the cursor around the WinView 32 desktop until you see the desired axis orientation Then release the mouse button Because the data is displayed the moment you depress the mouse button and then updated as you drag the cursor you can see the effects of dragging the axis while moving it When working with a high density data set every nth line will be suppressed during the adjustment so the process remains fast When the data is d
112. d keys move Same as Small Cursor and Graph combination Version 2 5 same frame or each may be from a different frame Same as Small Cursor and 3D Graph except that cursor ray projections through the cross section profiles are provided These will not necessarily be visually aligned with the cursor cursor to end points on strip Shift Home moves cursor to first strip Shift End moves it to the last strip Strip Selection As described above when displaying data as a graph the up down arrow keys can be used to select a higher or lower numbered strip This is true if displaying multiple strips or a single strip For additional utility where a large change is required Shift Home can be used to move the selection to the first strip and Shift End to move it to the last one Four of the Custom Toolbar buttons similarly allow the selected strip to be changed when data is displayed as a graph Selects the first strip Selects the last strip Ej Selects the next strip a Selects the previous strip These buttons have no effect on the strip selection when viewing data as an image Instead they select the first last next and previous frame respectively if the data set contains multiple frames Note When displaying the data as a graph to view data from multiple frames it is necessary to select Same Strip Multi Frame on the 3D Layout tab page of the Display Layout dialog box It might further b
113. d the signal should be applied to the inhibit input of the pulser to prevent pulsing during readout Shutter Comp Time Pre Delays the acquisition until the shutter if present is fully open The setting range is 0 to 30 ms For single strip spectroscopic measurements a setting of 0 is recommended RS170 Type Selections are NTSC US video standard and PAL European Show Custom Chip Advanced feature See Custom Chip discussion on page 153 Show Custom Timing Advanced feature See Custom Timing discussion on page 154 Anti Blooming THM 1024x1024FT CCD array Checking this box activates this CCD array s anti blooming feature Load Defaults From Controller Pops up the Load Factory Defaults From NVRAM dialog box so you can repopulate the fields and selections with the values stored in the controller s non volatile RAM Launch Camera Detection Wizard Pops up the Camera Detection Wizard Welcome dialog box so you can set up a new camera system or switch the active camera system to another camera system already connected to the host computer 40 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Entering the Data Orientation Hardware Setup 1133 Figure 22 Display tab page left graphic applies to all controllers except ST 121 right graphic applies to ST 121 only With the exception of the ST 121 the Display tab page is the same for all controllers Three display options Rotate Reverse and Flip are provided This feature allows you
114. default If there is only one species or if you want to discard the fast decay process simply enter zero for the fast decay Amplitude Amplitude This is the relative amplitude of the slow decay with respect to the fast one For example if you know that the amplitude of the slow decay signal is typically one fifth the amplitude of the fast decay signal you could enter 1 for the slow decay amplitude and 5 for the fast decay amplitude Keep in mind that it is the ratio that is being expressed For example there is no difference between entering slow and fast amplitude values of 1 and 5 and entering fast and slow amplitude values of 10 and 50 146 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 View Width Delay Sequence Opens a Width Delay Sequence El dialog box listing the currently programmed Width usec Delay usec sequence of gate width and gate delay 5 000000000000 1 000000000000 values 5 000000000000 6 000000000000 5 000000000000 11 000000000000 5 000000000000 16 000000000000 Save Sequence Values to File When this 5 000000000000 21 000000000000 box is checked the sequence values will be 5000000000000 26 000000000000 5 000000000000 31 000000000000 saved on completion of the run The values Ek penre hesan am aa aat 5 000000000000 saved are those actually used to take the data The file could be recalled later and used for data normalization or other purposes 41000000000000 F annnnNNNNNN
115. defragment the host computer s hard disk This operation reduces the time the computer spends locating files Typically the defrag utility Disk Defragmenter can be accessed from the Windows Start menu and can usually accessed from the Programs Accessories System Tools subdirectory After defragmenting the hard disk turn off the computer and make the USB cable connections between the host computer and the ST 133 Then turn the ST 133 on before turning on the host computer At bootup Windows will detect the Princeton Instruments USB2 Interface hardware 1 e the USB 2 0 Interface Control module You may be prompted to enter the directory path s for the apausbprop dll and or the apausb sys file s either by keyboard entry or by using the browse function If you selected AUTO PCI during the application software installation WinView automatically put the required INF DLL and USB driver file in the Windows directories shown below Refer to the Table 2 below for the file locations Windows USB INF USB Properties DLL USB Device Driver Name Version Filename Located in Located in Located in Windows System32_ Windows System32 Drivers Windows INF directory directory directory Windows rsusb2k inf in apausbprop dll in apausb sys in 2000 and XP WINNT INF WINNT System32 for WINNT System32 Drivers for for example example example The INF directory may be hidden Table 2 USB Driver Files
116. dialog DOX ecccccseesseeseeeseeseesecsseeneceeenseens 85 ASCII Output Setup dialog DX cccccccecceesseesseesseessecseenseceseceeeeeeeseeeneneeses 87 Clean Cycles in Freerun Operation ccccccccesccessceeseeneeeseecseeessecseeenseeneenaeees 89 Cleans Skips tab page cccccccescesscesscesecesseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecseecsaeessesaeenaecnaeenseees 90 Timing Tab page External Sync with Continuous Cleans Selected 90 External Sync Timing Diagram ccccccccesecessceseceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeesaes 91 External Sync with Continuous Cleans Timing Diagram s ssse0sss00s00000 91 Cleans Skips tab page Continuous Cleans Instruction ec eeeeeeseeeeeeees 92 Assumed CCD Array Orientation ccccecccecsceeseeeseeeeeeeeesseeecneesseeseeeneaeeaes 95 Single Full width ROI cccccccccssecsseescecsseceseceeeseecseeeseeeeeeeeeecsaeenseeneeseenes 97 Single Partial width ROL ccccccccccecsseeseceseceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaecaeenseeeaeees 97 Multiple Full width ROIs ccccscccssecssecsseceeceeceecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeesaes 97 Multiple ROIs with Different Widths 0 ccceccceecessceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeseeesaes 97 Multiple Imaging ROIs and Resulting Data 0 0 eee eceecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeens 98 ROL Setup tab page icc seis hotel ertr a a a alent tases 99 Data Corrections tab page cccccccccsseessecstecsteceeceseceecseeeeeeeeeneeeseeeseeesseesaees 102 Blemish Biles Ars
117. dialog bOX nsssssnsessnsseseesseesesseesssseesesesse 146 Sequence Values File dialog DOX cceccsscceseceseeeneeeeeeneeeseeeseeseeeseenseees 146 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup c cecccesccesseereeeseeeteeesseesees 147 Default Custom Toolbat ienna ni ss 149 Customize Toolbar dialog DOX cccecceecesseseseeeeeeeeeeeeseecsaeesseenseeneenaeen 149 Custom Chip tab page serieei sieves caceeuad devs cout cauevins does es EAE ERS 153 Custom Timing tab page ccceccccsccesceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaecsaeseseeesaeeeeenaees 154 FITS dialog Ox ti iano naa tata aoea dante a A 155 Macro Record dialog DX cccccsccsseesseesteceeceeceseceeceeeceeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeaaes 155 Virtual Chip Functional diagram ccccccesccesccessceeeceeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaaes 156 Virtual Chip dialog OX cccccccecssecssecssecesecesecesecsecseeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeaaes 156 WinSpec WinView or WinXTest Selection dialog box eceeseerteeeee 183 Maintenance dialog DOX ceccecsseesseesseensecsseceseceseceseceeeeseeeeeaeeeseesseeeseeesaes 184 Media Password dialog DOX cccccsscesseesseceteceeceseceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseeeeeeaaes 184 Select Components dialog DOX cccescesceesscessceeeeeeeeeeseeeeecseeeeecsseenseenaeen 184 Cameral in Controller Type Filed cc ecceccccessesseeeseeeneeeseecsseeseceeenseen 189 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict dialog DOX ceecceesceeseereeeees 190 Hardware Wizard Interface dial
118. display the Cancel Heb righthand dialog box shown in Figure 35 Earlier versions display the lefthand dialog box 3 Note the Hardware LUT field This selection sets the scaling of the video display only Unless the signal is very weak the best LUT choice will be Gamma Figure 35 PentaMAX Interactive Operation dialog box 4 Click on the RUN button in the Interactive Operation dialog box Data acquisition at the fastest possible rate will commence immediately and the image will be displayed on the video monitor Note that the image will not be displayed on the computer monitor while the Interactive Operation dialog box is open 5 Focus the system optics and if necessary adjust the Exposure Time in the Interactive Camera dialog box for the best viewed image The exposure time will be the same as that set via the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two exposure settings track Changing it at either location should update the other setting automatically 6 When no further improvement in the observed image can be obtained click on Stop in the Interactive Operation dialog box to halt focus mode operation 7 Click on Close to close the Interactive Operation dialog box and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box 54 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Data Collection 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data Data collection can be initiated by means of the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog box by selecting Fo
119. ditor open PVCAM INI which is located in the Windows directory C WINNT for example If the contents of the file look like Camera 1 gt Type 1 Name Cameral Driver rspipci sys Port 0 Camera 2 gt Type 1 Name Camera2 Driver apausb sys Port 0 Change the headings so the contents now look like Camera 2 Type 1 Name Cameral Driver rspipci sys Port 0 Camera 1 Type 1 Name Camera2 Driver apausb sys Port 0 Note The Camera _ must be changed so the camera supported by the USB interface will be recognized the USB driver is apausb sys For consistency you may also want to change the camera names 6 Save the file With the ST 133 connected and on open WinView 32 7 Run the Hardware Wizard 8 When the PVCAM dialog box Figure 165 is displayed click in the Yes radio button click on Next and continue through the Wizard After the Wizard is finished the Controller Camera tab card will be displayed with the Use PVCAM checkbox selected You should now be able to acquire data PVCAM Are you using a PYCAM supported camera C No cot toe Figure 165 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog box Appendix F Troubleshooting 195 Detector Temperature Acquire and Focus are Grayed Out Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier These functions and others will be deactivated if you have installed a camera being run under USB 2 0 and have opened WinView 32
120. e 0 scramble 1 unscramble 660 long lexpos exposure val 32 bits when exposure 1 664 long lnoscan no of scan 32 bits when noscan 1 668 long lavgexp no of accum 32 bits when avgexp 1 672 char stripfil 16 strip file Not used by WinView a 688 char version 16 SW version amp date 01 000 02 01 90 7 704 int controller_type 1 new st120 2 old st120 AJ 3 st130 type 1 4 st130 type 2 y 5 st138 6 DC131 and ST133 F YT FILE HEADER The YT variables are not used by WinView KJ 706 int yt_file defined set TRUE for YT data file xy 708 int yt_fh calib mode calibration type 710 int yt_fh_calib_type time unit calibration type Xy 712 int yt_fh_element 12 element number E 736 double yt_fh_calib_data 12 data 832 float yt_fh time factor time factor ay 836 float yt_fh start_time start time m7 840 int reverse_flag set to 1 if data should be Ei reversed 0 don t reverse E T Version 1 6 Header All WinView WinSpec files version 1 6 and WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 data files must begin with the following 4100 byte header Data files created under previous versions of WinView WinSpec can still be read correctly However files created under the new versions 1 6 and higher cannot be read by previous versions of WinView WinSpec Header Structure Listing Decimal Byte Offset unsigned int diod
121. e ae 1 ta 248 Datatype UINTI6 i ni Datatype FLOAT F Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 113 Input tab page Figure 114 Output tab page Apply Close Help Output tab page The Output tab page Figure 114 allows you to name the output file It additionally allows you to select whether the modified data is to be displayed and to select the data type The frame and X Y range are reported information only 123 124 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Threshold and Clipping Clipping an image causes pixels outside the Threshold and Clipping specified range to be changed When Clip High is selected all pixels with values greater than the Clip High value will be changed to the Clip High value When Clip Low is selected all pixels with values less than the Clip Low value will be Input Parameters Output i Operation i C Clip Low changed to the Clip Low value Selecting Clip C Clip High Both will use both Clip High and Clip low C Clip Both values during the same processing step The Threshold function converts an image to Diana 7 binary black and white All intensity values TREES Yea below the threshold setting are zero black All LowClip i those above become ones white e High Clip Procedure 1 Select Clipping Threshold from the Process menu 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input EE ewe e image does not appear in the Input Image E b
122. e 11 Camera Detection Wizard Detected Hardware dialog boX eeeeeeeeee 30 Figure 12 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome Manual selected dialog box 31 Figure 13 Camera Detection Wizard Optional Configuration Disk dialog box 32 Figure 14 Camera Detection Wizard Test Image dialog bOX 0 0 ceccecseesteetteesteeneees 32 Figure 15 Camera Detection Wizard Finished dialog DOX 0 ceeeseseereeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 33 Table of Contents Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Optional Configuration Disk dialog DOX eceeceeseesseesceeeeceeeeeeceeeeaeeeeenaeeas 34 PVCAM dialog DOX c ccccecceesseesseeseeeseeesaecssecaecesecnsecnseesseesneeecsessaeseaeeeeeenaes 34 Interface dial g BOX icisrcin oriens ealib cote rota iteaweuk vans i 34 Controller Type dialog DOX ccccecccesseessceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseecseecsseesaeenseenseenaeees 35 Detector Camera C
123. e 123 Threshold and Clipping Parameters tab page c cccccscessesseeseeteeeseeees 124 Example Cross Sections of an ROI ccceecccescceseceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaaes 125 Cross Section Parameters tab page ccccccescsssscessceeeceeeeeeseeseeentecsseenseenseen 125 Table of Contents Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 ix Postprocessing Binning and Skipping Parameters tab page eee 126 Postprocessing Histogram Parameter tab page ceeseseeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 128 Print Setup dialog DOX ccccccccecsseessecssecsecsecesecesecesecseeeeeeeseaeseseeeeeeneeeaaes 129 Print dialog Dox onina datas dessa EA A E RART 130 Print Preview Window aiee ei ari a a e a eari 130 Puilsers Gidlog boR epena aae a ani hess 133 PG200 Comm Port tab page ccccccccssecsseceseceseceeeceseceeeeseeeeseeeeseesseeenseennes 1
124. e MCP turn off Because the MCP is gated on earlier it is on for a longer period of time and therefore there is a slight loss of on off ratio However you would be able to capture a non repetitive event Anticipator Select this if the experiment is repetitive driven by an external trigger at a constant frequency and the event of interest would occur before the MCP has fully turned on It is critical that the trigger pulse be as jitter free as possible since the anticipator circuit will look at the pulse repetition rate for the first pulse to pulse period and then anticipate each of the subsequent external triggers in the series In this way the bracketing pulse is 140 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 timed to lead the photocathode gate pulse by the anticipate time entered in the Anticipate By field The on off ratio in the UV is retained For proper operation the bracketing pulse must begin at least 500 ns before the gate pulse The minimum Anticipator Time is 500 ns or the minimum PI MAX bracket lead time from EEPROM minus the minimum Gate Delay time For example with a minimum Gate Delay time of 200 ns the minimum Anticipator time would be 300 ns 12 Click the OK button This writes all of the parameter values to the PTG Note The PTG can also be controlled interactively as data is being collected For more information see the discussion of this feature starting on page 147 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator The
125. e OVerview ccccsceescesessseeseesecsceeneeseceaesaesenceaecaeeeeeeseceaeeaeeeeceaecaeeereeaeeaeenee 27 Entering the Default Camera System Parameters into WiNVieW ecceeceeseeeeteeeeeeeeeees 29 Entering Controller and Detector Characteristics 0 ccesessssceceereeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeaeeeneeseenee 36 Entering the Data Orientation ccccccecsceesceesceessecsseceseceseceseceseeseeseeeeeseceseeeseeeseeeaeesaees 40 Entering the Interface Communication Parameters 0 ccecesceceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeceeceaeeeeeneeaes 4 Entering the Cleans Skips Characteristics cccccesccssscsesceeseeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeeaaecsaeenseenaeens 42 Chapter 3 Initial Data Collection ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 45 THUTOCUCEION espa ar on a A E ER E TE a E R AES 45 Temperature Control ii 2 c5 ccdoreeeaaeselesvaecdoa ede a a a A A ATE 46 Cleans and SKPS e r a E E a A A a ai 47 Experiment Setup Procedure all controllers ccccccesccescceseceseeeeesseeeeeeeeeseecsaeenseenaeens 47 Data Collection Procedures Controller Specific cccccccccsccesceeceeeeeeseeeneeeteeeneeeseeensees 51 Data Collection All Controllers nisi nnn aer iaeiaiai 54 Chapter 4 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 55 Tit CCE OTN Seed castes AEA A E te ist tala TE 55 Opening Data Files c ce ccccescesecesecesecesecseeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeseecseecssecsaecaecseceseessesseseseeeenneesgs
126. e ROI region is displayed Click on the a Undo Zoom In Button The original view will be restored 65 amp CIRCUIT SPE 268 X 248 X 1 iol x f iia Tk Ee O a lt 7 Gy My M P lo 2 Q Z laa A o o WS V w l m ZT Figure 49 Circuit spe with Region selected for viewing CIRCUIT SPE 268 X 248 X 1 id Q Q afar Figure 50 Circuit spe expanded to show Defined Region 66 WinView 32 Manual Data Window Context menu For your convenience the essential data window functions have been gathered into a single menu illustrated in Figure 51 This menu available whether the data is displayed as an image graph or 3D graph can be accessed by right clicking anywhere in the data display area Brief descriptions of the provided functions follow Note Right clicking inside an ROI will open the ROI context menu Labeling Images and Graphs Version 2 5 1 Autoscale Auto 5 95 Cursor gt Zoom gt New gt Colorbar v Info Bar v Toolbar Display Layout File Information Figure 51 Data Window Context menu For graphs and images the normal context menu right click is as shown in Figure 52 E Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 Autoscale Auto 5 95 Cursor Zoom New Info Bar v Toolbar Display Layout File Information Figure 52 Normal Context menu This menu was changed for ROIs If there is an RO
127. e detailed descriptions for each button at the desktop level are provided at the left side of the Status Bar Status Bar help messages are also provided for the menu selections 16 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Additional Documentation Additional documentation can be found in the WinView32 Documentation directory on the hard drive where WinView 32 was installed Among the files that may be in this directory are WINHEAD TXT _ This file contains documentation on the header structure for WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 Data Files TXT files can be opened with any ASCII text editor WinX_readme doc This is a read me file that contains the latest information on new features fixed problems and work arounds for issues not yet solved WinX32 Automation 3 X for Visual Basic pdf This file is stored in the directory when the Visual Basic User Interface component is selected during installation It describes how to create your own Snap Ins by using Visual Basic Professional Edition and the WinX32 Automation files Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader WinX32 Programming for Macro Record pdf This file is stored in the directory when the Macro option is installed It provides detailed information on how to create and edit macro programs for WinView 32 Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader The Macro option is not supplied with the standard WinView 32 program Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinView 32 To ensure that the computer you have can operate the
128. e dialog box to enter those values 5 Define the filter by entering the appropriate values in the Filter Matrix 6 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 11 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 119 Look Up Table Look Up Table tab page Look Up Table xj The Look Up Table function uses an ASCII text file provided by the user to translate pixel intensities from an input file into different intensities in an LOTT tet output file The input file must be a DAWN Data Files LUT1 tat raw data file unsigned 16 bit image since the Look Up Table mapping assumes a 0 65536 range of intensity values in the input file The map file is a previously created text file refer to pages 120 and 121 for descriptions of the LUT formats that must be converted to a binary map file for the actual operation After the text file is selected clicking on the Create Binary LUT button converts the text information to binary format Clicking ieee tw we e Input Look Up Table Output m Input LUT Setup File Create Binar LUT on Apply then remaps the image intensities and redraws the data display Figure 112 Look Up Table window appropriately Look Up Table Procedure Use the following procedure to process data using the LUT 1 2 3 Select Look Up Table from the Process menu Using the Input and Output tab pages enter the Input and Output file names On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on
129. e noted that these buttons do not appear on the default Custom Toolbar Instead they must be added using the Customize Toolbar dialog box accessed by selecting Custom Toolbar on the Setup menu Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 77 Cursor Curve and Marker Curves In analyzing a data display it is often desirable to highlight the cursor curve and to have every nth curve displayed in a different color as a convenient marker WinView 32 provides these functions as demonstrated in the following procedure 1 On the 3D Layout tab page select Highlight Cursor Curve and Marker Curves On Then press OK The cursor curve and marker curves should be clearly delineated Note that on a color monitor they would be in contrasting colors and much easier to see than in a black and white print Figure 69 Moon4 spe 275 X 387 X 1 1 TA Pixel 156 Intensity 6003 00 point 156 strip 241 frame 1 Figure 69 3D display with Cursor Curve and Marker Curves Note that displaying the data with Highlight Cursor Curve displayed affects the time required to step the cursor from curve to curve If Highlight Cursor Curve is OFF the cursor can step without updating the entire display If Highlight Cursor Curve is ON the entire display updates with each step a considerably slower operation If the Cursor Curve and Marker Curves don t appear the problem may be with the assigned colors which should be different from the normal graph color an
130. e selected the background will be subtracted first before the flatfield correction Background Subtraction with Intensified Cameras To properly perform background subtraction with an intensified camera a new background must be acquired whenever the intensifier gain setting is changed This is necessary because changing the intensifier gain also affects the dark charge of the intensifier EBI Chapter 9 Correction Techniques 103 Flatfield Correction Flatfield correction allows you to divide out small nonuniformities in gain from pixel to pixel The instructions below set the flatfield correction to be performed before data are saved to RAM or disk Acquiring a Flatfield File This operation is similar to normal data acquisition Acquistion Display Tools 1 Use exactly the same temperature setting as will be used in data Espenmen Rett collection Wait at least 30 minutes after the camera has reached Acquire operating temperature to ensure stability Focus Video Focus 2 Set the same binning parameters and ROI If you plan to use a Hardware LT background file with data collection on the Experiment Setup Exposure Intensity dialog select Background and enter the name of the Readout Tine background file This background file will be subtracted from Sane Bachgourd the flatfield file before it is saved to disk 3 Illuminate the camera uniformly The accuracy of this Video uniformity will be translated into an accurate fla
131. e size of the input image When the maximum is reached to increase the binning size you must first decrease the skipping size then increase the binning size WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Histogram Calculation Introduction Two types of histograms are available for graphing the distribution of intensities of an image The Histogram operation groups pixels of a similar intensity together The X axis indicates the intensity and the Y axis displays the number of pixels in that intensity range The Cumulative Histogram operation groups pixels of a similar intensity together once again using the X axis to show intensity This time however the Y axis indicates the total number of pixels with intensity less than or equal to the range Thus the Cumulative Histogram is always an increasing function Procedure Histogram x 1 Select Histogram from the Process menu Input Parameters Output 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input image does not appear in the Input Image Operation box enter the complete file name or search aoaaa for a file using the browser accessed by the pr button to the right of the field C Cumulative Histogram 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame Soue containing the data on which the operation is to be performed Low f 3 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input High I Image enter the appropriate X Y range 1 values Alternatively use the mouse to draw cioa an ROI
132. e will be the same as that set via the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two exposure settings track Changing it at either location should update the other setting automatically The Intensity Scaling together with the Offset determines how the image data is mapped to the 256 gray scale levels Begin with the Intensity Scaling set to 1 to 4096 slider all the way to the right Similarly the Offset setting should initially be set to 2 slider all the way to left When no further improvement in the observed image can be obtained click on Stop in the Interactive Camera Operation dialog box to halt focus mode operation Click on Close to close the Interactive Camera Operation dialog box and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box Data Collection 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data An acquisition can also be started by clicking on Focus on the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button on the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed on the computer screen and on the video monitor To store the most recent image click Stop Acquisition on the Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page If you want to initiate data acquisition select Focus again To store the new data t
133. ea E a 26 Mouse requirement sneseseesesseeseeesseeeesseserseeseeses 18 Multiplication math operation seseseseeeeeeeeeeeeee 107 N O Natural Log math operation 107 Non Linear math operations sssseseseeseeeesseeesee 107 NOT math operation cecceseceseeseesseeeeeseeeeseees 108 NOT READY Sigtal cccceccsseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneees 39 NOT SCAN sifalar ce eto 39 NT log on requirements cccceesceeseeeeeeeeeteeeees 20 Number of Images ssseseeseeseeseeseesessesresseserseeseese 143 On CCD AccumulationS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeerererereeeee 146 On line data acquisition processes ASCI Outputs inina e e E wh ete 86 thresholding snenia eia 85 Online Help oVervieW cccccesceeseeeceeseeeeeeseeeseees 15 Opening data files sssi s 55 MUltiple HES srren n 57 Operations Absolute cionan ienei 107 Additions iite Girne nia 107 AND nnee eeen oa Mateus ena a iat ae at erat ie 108 210 WinView 32 Manual Operations DivisiOit 2csec sra niai a 107 Exclusive ORe E a 108 TOG K O EEE E E A AA 107 Na e D E EA E E A 107 MN ee eine ire in ARER 107 Mu ltiplicati n sssini nea 107 Nat ral L0g wo sec se eat i aie 107 NOD coetersse E Me Macias ce se each 108 OR is essersocseisitisias ieee iss aeeiethaasiaraserra dees 108 SqUare Rootin e aE R 107 SOLETAS E EEE I E E S 107 Subtraction ssssesssssesseesersesseeesseserssesersessreeessesees 107 Options C stom Chip ei eines 153 Custom Timing s eesseeeesee
134. ec CAN still be read correctly 3978 4018 special Intensity scaling string empty block to reach 4100 bytes ae 4098 Always the LAST value in the header 175 HOWEVER files created under the new versions 2 5 and higher CANNOT be read by previous versions of WinView WinSpec OR by the CSMA software package Start of Header Information 0 2996 ControllerVersion LogicOutput AmpHiCapLowNoise xDimDet mode exp_sec VChipXdim VChipYdim yDimDet date DATEMAX VirtualChipFlag Spare_1 2 noscan DetTemperature DetType xdim stdiode Deci Byte Offs OnFNO mal et Hardware Version Definition of Output BNC Amp Switching Mode Detector x dimension of chip timing mode alternative exposure in sec Virtual Chip X dim Virtual Chip Y dim y dimension of CCD or detector date On Off Old number of scans should always be Detector Temperature Set CCD DiodeArray type actual of pixels on x axis trigger diode 176 nore C CTO E EE CTR eT eT et er er er eT er er a E TE TE Ere short WORD DWOR floa floa floa floa floa floa hor hor hor hor hor hor ORD ORD hor hor hor har har hort atetetetettetet ttt to ct ct ct HMAANHDHHNDSTSZuNUNBABHHA O vs iw WOR WOR WOR WOR WOR cnar WORD o vuvUuUuU nar OO J hort loat hort hort hort hort loat hort DMnNnAHnHHMNAaAZA
135. eeceeeeeteeeeees 96 Setlip MOdE rsr ae a o 95 Roper Scientific USB2 driver installation 23 RSConfig exe oeseeseesseeersseserseesee 24 193 195 196 Save As dialog DOX cccecceesceeseeseeeseeeteeeseenseeeeenes 58 Save aS TYPE er a A A E TN 58 Save Sequence Values to File cceeeeeeeseereees 146 Saving data files 0 0 ceeeceeseeseceeeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeenes 58 Saving temporary data files ceeeseeseeeseeeteeseeeees 58 SCAN Gigtial sers e cov caeeeecbents 39 Screen capture Printing ceceeeseesteeseeeeeeseees 131 Sequential Mode Setup Exponential Increment ccceeccesseetseeseeeeees 144 Fast Amplitude parameter c cccccesseeseereee 145 Fast decay and Slow decay c cesceseeereereees 144 Fixed Increment 0 cc eeceeeceeeeceeeeteeeeneeeeenes 144 Gate Delayencics ie etek Ai ee 144 Gate Width oe ister deee a E E S 144 On CCD Accumulations sseseseesseeeeseeeeeseeseese 146 DAVE SCQCUCNCO Movs oi E R E E 146 sequential exponential algorithm 0 144 Slow Amplitude parameter cceeeeeeeeeteeetees 145 Time Constant parameter cece 145 Software Accumulations c cecceseeeeseetees 146 Time Constant iv aaee ian ea ates 145 View Width Delay ccceceeceesseeseeteeeeeeseees 146 SESSION DA T nuaran ENAR 185 Index Setup CUSTO i i ee tina et eee el os 20 Standatd PCL reenen eaei iE 20 SETUP progran sirenen ie neea aani 21 Sharpening p
136. eeeeeeeeeensees 78 PESIN EEE EEA cas stead sth at dons fonts kek 82 212 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This page intentionally left blank
137. eeeeensees 128 proced re a aenneren a aieeaa 128 Standard ceo ieee ni inie 128 I K VO addi sS oeiia e 41 VOAddreS SDR I cee eaea i 41 TEEE 488 GPIB port 140 Image Mathieseni 105 Image Graph and 3D Graph selection 6 62 Images labeling cceceeceescceseeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 66 Imaging data collection Initial SPH 3355 whee i edavn rained aire teenies 51 FOCUSING aes i coeticeccees ea ec citseces eee 51 Information box as active WindOW cceeeeseeees 74 Installation ADO innn i enii ei 21 from FTP Sitera rnn a a ei 21 multiple versions of WinView 32 sses 183 PCI card driver ee a a ee 22 USB 2 0 drivet cccccesiscesediheincieeseieises 23 Installing WinView 32 0 cceceeseeseseeeseeeeeeseeeseees 17 Intensifier gain effect on dark charge 0 102 Interface tab page ecceeseecceseceseceecseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeess 41 interrupt leVel c2ccc ccc ceccsncesiedteecectieseescevtnece 41 WV PO hssceieeavoctostaiuceseecvestestsdeteseads esate snttees coavbesice 41 DOM ibs tiara ih Reames 41 high speed PCL eeceeseseesseceseceteeneeeneeenes 41 PELTIMef cnrrenromneccnrannuiiiiaai 41 Interrupt leyele e is See N 41 Interrupt tab page OE a E E E T 41 V O address 2 and 3 0 0 eeceeecseeeceeeeeeteceeeeeneees 41 Introduction to manual esceeseeseeseeereeeeeeeseees 13 ISA interface card driver installation 0 cccceesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 KIN CUICS oo ed 5 oe eed
138. eeees 79 axes labeling s eeeseeeesseeeeseeeessrsersresersesseeesssesees 81 Brightness oshere eiii ieii 64 color of axes and labels cceccecseeseereeeeeeees 81 context WINKOW ee ceeecesecseeescescecseeeseeeeeeneeeseeerens 66 CULSOL FUNCTIONS ce eeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeneees 75 Display Layout dialog bOX c cecsesseeteereeeees 79 Display Layout Range tab page 0 0 cece 82 information DOX cccececeseesseerseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteessees 80 ROM 4c aaae e aae Dove deans EA aS APAS 65 Data file compatibility 000 00 ccc ceceeeeseseeereeeeeeeeeees 55 Data File tab page eececcescssecsseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeensees 59 Data files CLOSING 23 2 Popes hee Rel thane eee 59 eletin gi seve areren a n ceetinee 60 ACOMIZIN Prea E EENE E 59 OPCNING sii E A E E E TEE eee 55 reducing to iCON ssssesssesssesersseseesessreresresersreseese 59 SAVING oinrncenn ietin eiii ie 58 Data files temporary saving se sesseeeesseserseeeessee 58 Datastari entes maineira E EN E aeneehatts 180 Data structure Ver LAI nE aE AATE 171 Ver 1 6 and 32 bit versions s sesseeseesesseeeeseee 172 D EAEE S E E TE 175 Version 2 5 I Data Type Save AS 0 ceeccesseeeseceeeeeeeeceeeeeeneecees 58 Data Window Context menu ceceeseesteereeeeees 66 DELAYED TRIGGER OUT cc ceccccseetereteees 134 Deleting data files cecceeeseceteeseeereeeeeesseeeseeeeees 60 Demo interface cceecceesceescesecetece
139. eeneneenseeeeseseeaees 189 TAP CUA CEL OT 2554 5 Seca AE A ATA A ibe suGeade wo Sista aso dieu A EEAS 189 Camera or similar name on Hardware Setup dialog DOX ccccescesceeseeeeeeeeeeseeenes 189 Controller Is Not Responding cccecccecseesseeseeeceeceescecsaecesecnsecsseeseeseeeeneeeeseeeseeeseeesaes 190 Data Loss or Serial Violation ececeeceseeseeeseesecseeeceeseceaeeaeeeeceeceaecaeeeeeaecaeeeneesecaeeeees 190 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict message cccccsesceseceteceneceeecseeeseeeeeeeeseeeaaes 190 Data Overrun Has Occurred message cccccesseesseessecssecsseensecesecesecnseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeennes 191 Demo is only Choice on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog Ver 2 5 19 0 and earlier 191 Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer are Choices on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog Ver 2 5 19 0 and earlier cccccceeccesceesceeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeceecsaecsseceseenseenseeeas 193 Detector Temperature Acquire and Focus are Grayed Out Ver 2 5 19 0 and earlier 195 Error Creating Controller message ccccccccecsseesseesseesseesecseceseeseeeeceeseeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeesaes 196 No CCD Named in the Hardware Wizard CCD dialog Ver 2 5 19 0 and earlier 196 OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update ccceccceccesseesseceseceseceseeeseeeeeeseeseneeeseeeseeeaeeaaes 197 Program Error MESSAGE ccccccsesscssrsecssscecseccsssscsessecseseececessutecsensesseaaeseneesentecseneeeeenens 198 Serial v
140. ees ee EN R 38 92 L M Labeling graphs and images ceccescesseeeeeeees 66 Linear math operations ceecceeceeseeeteeseeeneeeees 107 Log10 math operation cceecceseeseceteeseeneeenes 107 Logic 0 PentaMAX output 0 cc ceceeseeseereeeeeeereees 39 Logic 1 PentaMAX output 0 cece ceceesseerseeeeeeeeees 39 209 Look Up Table post processing OMAS a eee eeein nati eae eal eed 120 PLOCCAUIC oi a e a 119 TU E E E A EE See Look Up Table Macro Record EE E EE E 155 Main meninio aceea ei anae 26 Math A B and C tab pages eceeseeseeseeteeteeetees 105 data types DYtese se se0s aeanr sites EE 106 Oats seed cette estinctere a eti aa 106 int106 OT E EE es 106 UN oh regressed neei aiei cots 106 file tab paresse a ea s 105 operations Ratar A lS ni S E TETI 106 single file and constant seeeeeeeeeeeee 106 Parameters Catal typerne Memes as 106 display result cececseceseeseeeseeeteeeeeeseeeereees 106 PraM icc sete he ete eA seein aso eset 105 Input Output file name ee eeeeeeereee 105 X and Y Rangnes ances 105 procede a e anos sete 109 MAX math operation ccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenes 107 Memory requirements ccccescesesseceteesseeseeeeeees 17 MIN math operation ccceeeeceseeeteceteenseeneeenes 107 Morphological ccceeccesseeesceeeceseeeecsseeseeeeeenes 116 Morphological post processing procedure senice eee ne eee 117 Mouse Cursores e
141. egin processing 116 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Morphological Functions Parameters tab page Morphological Morphological operations are also accomplished by mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Morphological Parameters tab page There are two basic morphological mask Input Parameters Output s gt Mask Type Mask Operation operations Erode and Dilate The effect of the li serioen Eidet Dilate Erode process is to reduce the size of a white Block E ree region while Dilation increases it All the options C Harz except for Block and User Defined perform the C Wert ha operation in a specific direction only Block 2 diagonal wine performs the operation in all directions ak diagonal Kemel Note Depending on the software version Iterations and the Open and Close functions may be grayed out as in Figure 107 If these 1 1 features are not grayed out Open is a number of a_i io S Ss I erodes specified by Iterations followed by the same number of dilates Close performs the dilates first and then the erodes 7 Apply Close Help Examples of some morphological operations follow References are found at the end of this Figure 107 Morphological Parameters chapter In each case the same binary image is tab page shown to the left and the morphologically processed image is shown to the right RR Figure 108 Original Image left and Dilated Image rig
142. en 0 num of physical pixels X axis a int avgexp S 2 number of accumulations per scan xJ if gt 32767 set to 1 and y E see lavgexp below 668 F int exposure 4 exposure time in milliseconds y if gt 32767 set to 1 and y see lexpos below 660 yA unsigned int xDimDet 6 Detector x dimension of chip int mode 8 timing mode float exp_sec 10 alternative exposure in secs E int asyavg 14 number of asynchron averages int asyseq Aa 16 number of asynchron sequential unsigned int yDimDet 18 y dimension of CCD or detector char date 10 E 20 date as MM DD YY int ehour 30 Experiment Time Hours as binary int eminute 32 Experiment Time Minutes as binary int noscan 34 number of multiple scans X if noscan 1 use lnoscan aa int fastacc hs 36 int seconds 38 Experiment Time Seconds as binary int Det Type 40 CCD DiodeArray type xJ unsigned int xdim 42 actual of pixels on x axis y int stdiode 44 trigger diode float nanox 46 a float calibdio 10 5 50 calibration diodes char fastfile 16 a 90 name of pixel control file ef int asynen 106 asynchron enable flag 0 off int datatype 108 experiment data type Ef is FLOATING POINT ee i LONG INTEGER F 2S INTEGER Appendix B float int int unsigned unsigned double unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned char unsigned char
143. ene nin are eT aA Seaea tea PAE tives asda RE 104 Math dialog bOX 122 4 ccsateestiesteea cdostazss doles che steesan AR 105 Operation tab Ppage ccccecccescesscsescseeceeseeeseeeseeeseecsaecsseceseceseceseeeeeeseeeeeneeass 107 Input stab pa Pe er ek ces veceie cas e veel gods vecaitn e a EE EE EE EAEE ST 111 Output tab page rnaen inte e a sae Ses a E a E elise athe 111 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page cccccssccssscessceseceeeceeeeeseeeseeeenes 112 Original Image left and Edge detected Image right 00 ee eeeeeeeeeees 113 Sharpening Parameters tab page cccccsscsscsseceseceseceeeceeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeessees 114 Original Image left and Smoothed Image right 0 ceceeseeseeeteeeteees 115 Smoothing Parameters tab page ccccesccesssessceeeceeseeeeeeseeeseeeseecssecnseeeaeen 115 Morphological Parameters tab page ccsccesscesscessceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeaaes 116 Original Image left and Dilated Image right cece cceesseeseeeteeeeeees 116 Original Image left and Eroded Image right cccecesseeseeeteeeteeeeees 116 Original Image left and Opened Image with Three Iterations right 117 Filter Matrix tab page crsciiecccttsakeatessnceriviaettes dasheustcbedeetiedeis edessuscebutanscasbeas 118 Look Up Tab Soci ve ssisscccets scale ting E E ETE EEE EEE 119 Input tab page srecen nane e a ea i A a eed ea RARS 123 Output tab Page sis seceisiessercsetiesiesi eaa a a a a e a ee
144. er is OFF for ALL system components including the host computer 2 Verify that the correct line voltages have been selected and that the correct fuses have been installed in the ST 133 3 Connect the TAXI cable to the PCI card at the host computer and to the Serial Com connector at the rear of the Controller Tighten down the locking screws 4 Connect the Camera Controller cable to the Detector connector on the rear of the Controller and to the Detector connector at the rear of the camera Tighten down the locking screws 5 Ifit has not been installed already connect a line cord from the Power Input module on the back of the Controller to a suitable AC power source 6 Turn on the Controller 7 Turn on the host computer and select the WinView 32 icon 8 From the Setup menu select Hardware and enter the following settings Controller CCD tab card Controller PentaMax or the appropriate ST 133 controller Controller Version 5 CCD Type appropriate frame transfer array EEV 512x512FT for this procedure Shutter Type None LOGIC OUT Output Shutter Readout Mode Frame Transfer Interface tab card Type the appropriate interface card For this procedure the selection is High Speed PCI 158 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Cleans Skips tab card Number of Cleans 1 Number of Strips per Clean 512 Minimum Block Size 2 Number of Blocks 5 9 From the Acquisition menu select Experiment Setup and enter the following settings
145. erformed on WinView data files This A B C functionality called Image Math is selectable from the Process Menu The four tab pages on the Math dialog box Figure 98 allow you to select the source file s operation and the input A destination file for the results of the selected El mathematical operation displayed at the top of Operation B jc the dialog box Additionally you can use the Pe a e mouse to specify an ROI to be processed bp Seo available on tab pages A and B Zu foe aee p aee al Source Data and Destination Selection pee fo ad ta g As many as three data files can be involved in math operations and there is a corresponding tab Datatype page for each of them A B and C A and B are Input Files C is always the Output File Every operation requires at least one Input File and an Duoi File Thus every Fon will require mej ea pee using tab pages A and C In those cases where a second Input File or a constant is required tab page B will also be used see the online Help for detailed descriptions of the individual Math file pages Figure 98 Math dialog box With but a few exceptions the parameters on the three file tab pages are the same Brief descriptions follow Frame If an input file contains multiple frames you can specify the ones to be processed The default is to process all frames You additionally have the option of choosing not to write all
146. es 1 Pages from fi to f A Selection Ohl Bo owe Figure 121 Print dialog box 1 Once the Print Setup is properly configured you can print the active window simply by selecting Print from the File menu shortcut Alt F P or by clicking on the Print button in the standard toolbar 2 Color mapping to the printer may differ from that shown on the screen To obtain the desired output color mapping you may wish to do a screen capture and then paste the image into a graphics program for final adjustment before printing Print Preview The Print Preview function gives you a quick idea of how the printed image will look It produces an on screen print that looks as closely as possible like a real print allowing changes in the printer setup to be made quickly and conveniently Figure 122 illustrates the Print Preview window Page m 70 Ae SS iji F TIECT ET T aa Figure 122 Print Preview window Chapter 13 Printing 131 The button functions are as follows Print Opens the Print screen so a print can be initiated Next Page If the file contains multiple frames each one will occupy a different page The Next Page button allows you to step forward sequentially through all available pages If the file contains only one image the Next Page button will be grayed out Prev Page Allows you to step backwards sequentially through the pages of a multiple image file Tw
147. es a eee a ey N A N A N A N A N A N A N A ST 133 HAM 122x1024B ST 133 HAM 252x1024 ST 133 HAM 250x1024B ST 133 TEK 512x512DB DF ST 133 TEK 1024x1024DB DF ST 133 EEV 1300x1340B F ST 133 2MHz MAR 512x512 CCD77 ST 133 2MHz EEV 1024x1024 CCD47_10 ST 133 HAM 124x1024 System and System Component Descriptions The following information briefly describes Princeton Instruments brand systems and the system components For more information contact your Princeton Instruments representative or Customer Support 166 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Systems 2D OMA V Cryogenically cooled focal plane array FPA based system for low light level NIR imaging 0 8um 1 7um InSight Includes an f 3 9 imaging spectrograph integrated with a high performance digital CCD The system is pre aligned and focused at the factory allowing for effortless integration into experiments MicroMAX Name used for some ST 133 based imaging systems usually with an RTE head The 5 MHz version is characterized by duplex head cable OMA V Cryogenically cooled Photodiode array PDA based system for spectroscopy applications PDA Low cost spectroscopy system uses ST 121 controller PentaMAX A D electronics are in the head so no controller is necessary Runs with PCI card only Both unintensified and intensified versions are available PhotonMAX EMCCD electron multiplying CCD Optimized for both traditional CCD and on chip multipl
148. es is selected and then click on Next The Hardware Wizard should continue to the Controller Type dialog box No CCD Named in the Hardware Wizard CCD dialog Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier Detector Camera CCD Select the type of detector or camera that your controller is running Figure 168 Hardware Wizard Detector Camera CCD dialog box If you have installed a USB 2 0 Interface Module in your ST 133 a blank field may be displayed in the Detector Camera CCD dialog box Figure 168 if the ST 133 controller was made before January 2001 Earlier versions of the ST 133 did not contain non volatile RAM NVRAM which is programmed with information about the controller and the camera PVCAM the program under which the Princeton Instruments USB works retrieves the information stored in NVRAM so it can enter specific camera characteristics into WinView 32 Appendix F Troubleshooting 197 Check the serial label on underside of your controller If the first five characters are D1200 December 2000 or earlier JO797 or July 1997 for example contact Customer Support to find out about an NVRAM controller upgrade OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update This procedure is highly recommended when a laptop computer will be used to communicate with the ST 133 We recommend the SHG Inc USB 2 0 PC Card Model US2246 if USB 2 0 is not native to the laptop s motherboard To reduce the instances of data overruns and serial violations the OrangeUS
149. est Image dialog box Depending on your radio button selection the following will happen e No Clicking on the Next button will load the camera controller default parameters into WinView and pop up the Finished dialog box e Yes Assuming that the camera system is connected to the host computer and turned on clicking on the Next button will acquire a single frame of data using a 100 msec exposure time load the camera controller default parameters into WinView and pop up the Finished dialog box Click on Finish to complete the camera installation Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 33 Camera Detection Wizard Finished x The camera detection wizard has completed successfully E Cancel Help Figure 15 Camera Detection Wizard Finished dialog box Hardware Setup Wizard WinView Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier If your software version is 2 5 19 6 or later go back to the previous topic for a description of the Camera Detection Wizard used in those versions of the WinView software The Setup Wizard runs the first time you select SetuplHardware after WinView 32 has been installed on the host computer for the first time or when you are setting up a new controller for running in multi controller mode Ifa PIHWDEF INI file has been copied to your WinView 32 directory the selections specified in the PIHWDEF INI will be implemented for the first controller and the Setup Wizard is not necessary The wizard leads you
150. et ent eich ees 126 restrictions and liminations c ceceeeeeees 127 Bitwise math operations AND et vanities alten loa kih 108 Complement ota Rete hee eet 108 EXCLUSIVE ORY sich Girt ee a eaa EE Aee 108 OR R T E eave dived cate crebh soesve tad 108 Block Si monietninen eian eiei 44 C Calibration structures cccccccccceesseeeeenees 174 178 Camera Detection wizard sesesesseseseeserserseeressee 29 Cautions running different Versions c ceceeeeeeeeees 185 WinView 32 amp WinSpec 32 in same directory 20 21 CCD Blemish removal ceeceseeseeseereeeeeneeenes 104 Circuit spe displayed 0 0 0 ccescsseesseetseeeeeseeseeeseees 63 Clean Cycles iccic ssecca seed nedsceccie staged dives tates 89 CLEANING signal iesene 39 Cleans Skips tab page ccccssccsseeseeeseeeeeeseeereeseens 42 Cl CATS AE EE E cies leeees A sents otoasde 42 Minimum Block Size ccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 Number of Blocks 0 0 0 ececeeeceseeeeteeeeeeeceeeeneees 44 Number of Cleafs ascen aei 42 Number of Strips per Clean ccceeeeseeseesteeres 42 Use Continuous Cleans Instruction 00 43 Cleans Skips tab page parameters Clen ModS senema en eerste 42 Aaa ee E aT a EE E EE 44 Clipping and Threshold procedure e 124 Closing a data Meyson n 59 Color axes labels graphs background and surfaces 81 Compatibility WinView 16 and WinView 32 185 Complement
151. f Expasurefs and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Cancel Help Setup dialog box will close and you will return to the PG200 dialog box Figure 127 Repetitive Gating Setup dialog box Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 128 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly Fixed or exponentially as the measurement progresses Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses If the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters see Sequential Mode Parameters on page 143 for more information as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will close and you will return to the PG200 dialog box 136 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Sequential Gating Setup Figure 128 Sequential Gating Setup dialog box Click on the Gating tab Select Gating Mode HV Pulsing Enabled to start gating the intensifier Be sure you have followed all intensifier precaut
152. fant E fusec x T Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed r Increment Type Fined width Increment 0 usec Delay Increment 5 usec beet Wena Slaw Desay 2 Time Constan F Jeni gt Time Corian m E ume Exponential ETIU i a Sarii E i View Width Delay Sequence I Save Sequence Values To File raup Pyle r On EED Accumulations Software Accumulations for es of Exposuets f Gates Per Emeh Figure 134 Sequential Gating Setup box Chapter 14 10 11 Pulser Operation 139 Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses In any case if the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters see Sequential Mode Parameters on page 143 for more information as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will close and you return to the PTG dialog box Select Burst On or Off If you select ON each trigger will initiate a burst of gate pulses Set the number of pulses in the burst and their period Note If Burst and Bracket Pulsing are both selected the entire burst will be bracketed but not the
153. for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqEndWidth 130 End Width for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqStartDelay 134 Start Delay for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqEndDelay 138 End Delay for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqiIncMode 142 Increments 1 Fixed 2 Exponential PImaxUsed 144 PI Max type controller flag PImaxMode 146 PI Max mode PImaxGain 148 PI Max Gain BackGrndApplied 150 1 if background subtraction done PImax2nsBrdUsed 152 T F PI Max 2ns Board Used minblk 154 min of strips per skips numminblk 156 of min blocks before geo skps SpecMirrorLocation 2 158 Spectro Mirror Location 0 Not Present SpecSlitLocation 4 162 Spectro Slit Location 0 Not Present CustomTimingFlag 170 T F Custom Timing Used ExperimentTimeLocal TIMEMAX 172 Experiment Local Time as hhmmss 0 ExperimentTimeUTC TIMEMAX 179 Experiment UTC Time as hhmmss 0 ExposUnits 186 User Units for Exposure ADCoffset 188 ADC offset ADCrate 190 ADC rate ADCtype 192 ADC type ADCresolution 194 ADC resolution ADCbitAdjust 196 ADC bit adjust gain 198 gain Comments 5 COMMENTMAX 200 File Comments geometric 600 geometric ops rotate 0x01 reverse 0x02 flip 0x04 xlabel LABELMAX 602 intensity display string cleans 618 cleans NumSkpPerCln 620 number of skips per clean SpecMirrorPos 2 622 Spectrograph Mirror Positions SpecSlitPos 4 626 Spectrograph Slit Positions AutoCleansActive 642 T F UseContCleansInst 644 T F AbsorbStripNum 646 Absorbance Strip Number SpecSlitPosUnits 648 Spectr
154. for desktop computers and the SIG Inc USB 2 0 PC Card Model US2246 is recommended for laptop computers Minimum of 256 Mb of RAM CD ROM drive Hard disk with a minimum of 80 Mbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 17 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data storage depending on the number and size of images collected Disk level compression programs are not recommended Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 256 colors with at least 1 Mbyte of memory Memory requirement is dependent on desired display resolution Two button Microsoft compatible serial mouse or Logitech three button serial bus mouse Operating System Requirements TAXI Protocol Windows 95 Windows 98SE Windows ME Windows NT ver 4 0 or higher Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system WinView 32 is not supported under OS 2 Nor will it run under Windows 3 1 or 3 11 USB 2 Protocol Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 Windows XP with Service Pack 1 or later operating system Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinView 32 Your System Components Take a few minutes and enter the information in the table below Various pieces of this information will be required when you install WinView 32 when the Setup Wizard see Camera Detection wizard or Hardware Setup wizard pages 29 or 33 respectively runs and when you begin entering component information on the dialog boxes and tab pages as
155. g WinView 32 from the Program Manager WinView 32 follows the Windows 95 graphical interface conventions While the software is booting a splash screen such as the one shown in Figure 3 is displayed until the software has finished loading and initializing Then the Main Menu appears as shown in Figure 4 From there you can access the program s functions through menu selection Note If this is the first time you have installed and launched WinView 32 the Camera Detection Wizard or the Hardware Wizard for older versions of the software will pop up This wizard allows you to specify the camera system and load the default hardware settings before you can access the menu See Chapter 2 page 29 for more information about the Camera Detection Wizard and page 33 for information about the Hardware Wizard E WinView 32 lel x File Edit View Acquistion Display Tools Process Macio Setup Options Window Help ate G zE j BE ala 2 alela za a aao a For Help press F1 I A e i mA Figure 3 Splash screen 26 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Menu Bar Custom Tool Bar WinView 32 Logo dick to access Control menu Window Control Boxes Main Display Area Status Bar Active Data Corrections Timer Clock For Help press F1 AA Figure 4 Main WinView 32 window Values labels and alphanumeric data are usually entered from the keyboard Selections and screen control operations are usually done
156. ge pixels and strips with respect to the CCD chip used to acquire the image The vertical image intensity profile at the cursor position will be displayed to the left and the horizontal image intensity profile at the bottom The minimum and maximum values for each profile are indicated Note that you can use the mouse and drag the axes and profile boundaries to change the size of the profile display regions To change the cursor location simply click the mouse at the new spot The cross sectional graphs will change to reflect the profiles at the new location Information box On the View menu select Info The information box should appear as shown in Figure 75 The intensity in A D counts is reported at the pixel and strip position corresponding to the cursor position Also reported are the Frame number Aspect ratio and X and Y Zoom in effect If a region is defined by dragging the mouse cursor the region coordinates and diagonal length will also be reported Version 2 5 E Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 Z 1 i 4720 Figure 74 Circuit spe with Axes and Cross Sections CIRCUIT SPE 268 X 248 X 1 Row 72 Column 106 Intensity 5485 00 frame 1 aspect 1 00 zoom 1 52 1 52 box 72 108 J to 215 182 diagonal 161 01 ag Figure 75 Information box Autoranging the Intensity in a ROI 1 Drag the mouse cursor to define a rectangular region of interest on the displayed image 2 Click o
157. ger mode either Internal in which the PG200 free runs or External in which it is triggered from an external source If operating in the Internal trigger mode set the Trigger Frequency in Hz Consult the PG200 Manual to determine the maximum Trigger Frequency for a given set of conditions The PG200 Delay Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger outputs are programmed from the Triggers tab page They produce trigger outputs that are synchronized to and delayed from the trigger Trigger Sync mode or from the trailing edge of the gate pulse Gate Sync mode In the Gate Sync mode as the gate pulse changes its position and width the trigger outputs remain synchronized with the gate moving with it In the Trigger Sync mode the trigger outputs do not sweep with the gate but maintain their initial position The Delayed Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger outputs are independently programmable PG200 Triggers Gating Comm Port Port Type Seiad COM Port 2 4 PG200 Triggers Gating Comm Patt Trigger Frequency oog Hz Cancel Version 2 5 1 Apply All Settings Help M Trager Mode G intemal External Delay Tinggar 20 fusec X Delayed Trigger Sync Mode C Trooer Gate Ausilliary Trigger Auailliary Trigger Syne Mode Cancel C Tigger Gate Apply All Settings Help Figure 125 PG200 Triggers tab page Chapter 14 Pulser Operation
158. har str length for file name USERINFOMAX 1000 User information space COMMENTMAX 80 User comment string max length 5 comments LABELMAX 16 Label string max length FILEVERMAX 16 File version string max length DATEMAX 10 String length of file creation date string as ddmmmyyyy 0 ROIMAX 10 Max size of roi array of structures TIMEMAX 7 Max time store as hhmmss 0 Custom Data Types Used In the Structure BYTE unsigned char WORD unsigned short DWORD unsigned long 180 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Reading Data The data follows the header beginning at offset 4100 In WinView WinSpec the data is always stored exactly as it is collected The order of the data depends on the placement of the shift register In the diagram below the shift register is on the RIGHT SIDE of the chip Each COLUMN of data is first shifted RIGHT into the shift register and then DOWN The data is read and stored in this order First column read XnYm XnYm 1 XnY2 XnY1 Last column read X1Y m X1Ym 1 X1Y2 X1yY1 X1Y1 X2Y1 XnY1 S X1Y2 X2Y2 XnY2 H A X1Ym 1 X2Ym 1 XnYm 1 F V X1Ym X2Ym XnYm T Dramane gt gt A D In the diagram below the shift register is on the BOTTOM of the chip Each ROW of data is first shifted DOWN into the shift register and then RIGHT The data is read and stored in this order First row read Xnym X2Ym X1Ym Last row read XnYl X2Y1 X1Y1 X1Y1 X2Y1 XnY1 X1Y2 X2Y2 XnY2 X1Ym
159. he CCD is defined by the system gain Intensities given in ADUs provide a convenient method for comparing images and data generated by different cameras Also referred to as count and digital number Anti blooming Blooming is caused by saturation of one or more CCD pixels This can occur if the incoming light is too bright or when extensive serial and parallel binning is being performed When this saturation happens the excess charge overflows into the adjacent pixels and results in a streak or a blob appearing on the image Anti blooming is traditionally controlled by specific CCD architecture designs that drain the excess charge Avalanche Gain Also called on chip multiplication gain A technology that enables multiplication of charge i e electrons collected in each pixel of the CCD s active array Secondary electrons are generated via an impact ionization process that is initiated and sustained when higher than typical voltages are applied to an extended portion of the CCD s serial register Multiplying the signal above the read noise of the output amplifier enables ultra low light detection at high operation speeds Some CCD cameras with on chip multiplication gain utilize two output amplifiers an on chip multiplication gain amplifier that allows the camera to be used for low light high speed applications and a traditional amplifier for wide dynamic range applications Bias In a CCD camera system the minimum intensity req
160. he OK button This saves the flatfield filename for all future data acquisitions or until the Flatfield correction is turned off Each pixel in a new file will be divided by the corresponding pixel in the Flatfield file If both Flatfield and Background are selected the background will be subtracted first before the flatfield correction 104 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 CCD Blemishes Columns specified as bad in the blemish file will be replaced by interpolated data based on the column before and the column after the bad column as data is collected After you click on the Remove checkbox you can select the appropriate blemish file Clicking on the button at the right of the Blemish File Name field opens a browse dialog box so you can locate and select a file If you don t have a blemish file but have determined that there are one or more bad columns you can create one to be used Note CCD Blemishes removal may not be implemented in early releases of the software Creating a Blemish File Fi CCD Blemish ble Notepad iol x 1 Open an ASCII text editor Eie Edt Fomat Heh Q ay 2 On the first line key in the number of columns on the CCD For example you would key in 1024 if the CCD format was 1024 x 1024 Press Enter D 0 0 o Oo 0 0 o Oo 1 D 4 For each CCD column enter either a 0 no blemish or a 1 blemish and press Enter If Figure 97 Blemish File there was only one blemish and i
161. he controller and in many cases the camera detector Process button Causes the specified operation or process to be performed The process is performed on the data specified on the Input tab page and saved using the file name and data type specified on the Output tab page PVCAM Programmable Virtual Camera Access Method An exclusive Roper Scientific universal programming interface A set of software library routines that implements a detector or camera s operations in a hardware independent platform independent or virtual suite of function calls Once an application has been written to control one PVCAM enabled camera all PYCAM enabled cameras are then compatible with that application ROI Region of interest A user defined rectangular area a square is common on a CCD that is exposed and processed as an image Shutter Compensation Time The time it takes for a mechanical shutter to open or close This time needs to be accounted for during hardware setup so the software can allow enough time for the shutter to open before starting data acquisition and allow enough time for it to close before reading out the array Warranty amp Service Limited Warranty Princeton Instruments a division of Roper Scientific Inc Princeton Instruments us we our makes the following limited warranties These limited warranties extend to the original purchaser You you only and no other purchaser or transferee We have com
162. he entire CCD array and remove charge that has accumulated on the array while waiting for data acquisition to begin The charge on the CCD chip is transferred to the shift register and discarded to prevent charge buildup from occurring On completion of a setup successive clean cycles occur normally The Number of Cleans and Number of Strips per Clean parameters allow you to program additional clean cycles that will be performed after initiating the run but before any data is taken Number of Cleans For most applications the default value should be used Clicking on the Load Default Values button and then selecting Yes will install the default value Values other than the default can be directly entered in the field or selected via the spin buttons Number of Strips per Clean Sets the number of CCD data strips to be transferred and discarded during each clean The maximum valid setting is limited by the chip size The default value will generally give good results Clean Mode Photometrics cameras Sets when and how charge will be cleared from the array while the camera is waiting to acquire data Clearing removes charge from the CCD by clocking the charge to the serial register then directly to ground This process is much faster than a readout because the charge does not go through the readout node or the amplifier Note that not all clearing modes are available for all cameras Be sure to check availability of a mode before attempting to set it
163. hed The maximum value for this entry depends on the controller For example the range of values for an ST 133 is 0 7 and is 0 255 for an ST 138 Continuous Cleans Clean cycles will always occur but an additional Experiment Setup cleaning function called Continuous Cleans is Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Comections Ti it provided when the start of exposure is tied to an m d ea eea e external trigger i e the experiment is being run in Timing Mode External Sync timing mode External Sync 7 IV Continuous Cleans Figure 86 shows the timing diagram for an r Shutter Control experiment with External Sync trigger active on the Noma E negative edge Note that the timing diagram shows two possible setups for the shutter In the first setup C Sate Mode Normal the shutter is opened when External Sync Ai e goes low Because it takes time to open a shutter ae data may be missed while the shutter is opening In Wee Edge Trigger J edae the second setup Preopen the shutter is opened when the NOT SCAN signal at the SCAN BNC res ane ee ee on the back of the ST 133 goes high The soe Se sus te advantage is that the shutter is fully opened when Figure 85 Timing Tab page External the exposure triggered by External Sync begins Sync with Continuous Cleans Selected The disadvantage is that ambient light is no longer being blocked from the array during the period between NOT SCAN going high
164. hotoshop The 16 bit TIFF format is not as widely supported Images saved in this format can be opened and processed with Adobe Photoshop Chapter 14 Pulser Operation Introduction Three different pulser timing generators are available GBS x for use with WinView 32 To be available pulser Select Active Pulser support must have been installed as described in the C Paan Installation chapter Pulser support is then accessed by aces Setup FTG selecting Pulsers on the Setup menu and then ka a selecting the pulser to be used with the system Available selections include the Princeton Instruments PG200 Pulser the Princeton Instruments Programmable Timing Generator PTG plug in u module for the ST 133 high power ver 3 and the Stanford Research Systems DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Figure 123 Pulsers dialog box Generator with Inhibit Option C None The Model PG200 is available for all Princeton Instruments intensified cameras except the PI MAX Intensified CCD Camera which requires the PTG or DG535 All three pulser timing generators are programmable from WinView 32 Consult the applicable hardware manuals for detailed instructions on setup and connection to other devices PG200 Programmable Pulse Generator The PG200 is programmed via one of the serial ports of the computer such as COM1 or COM2 The choices provided by the tab pages are the same ones that are available using the PG200 front panel Basic PG200 operati
165. ht Re Figure 109 Original Image left and Eroded Image right Chapter 11 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 117 k L Figure 110 Original Image left and Opened Image with Three Iterations right Morphological Procedure Use the following procedure to morphologically process an image 1 2 3 Select Morphological from the Process menu Enter the Input Image and Output Image names On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Select the desired Mask Type and Mask Operation To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernel parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing 118 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Custom Filter Filter Matrix tab page Custom Filter The Custom Filter Filter Matrix tab Input Filter Matrix Output page allows you to set the filter matrix parameter values The filter is applied to the dataset specified via the Input tab page page 111 The processed data is saved in the file specified by the Output tab page page 111 Row a vie Cell Information Filtering is accomplished by mask operations defined by parame
166. ication gain operation Internal controller Vacuum guaranteed for the life of the camera PI Echelle Spectrograph that achieves high spectral resolution over the entire wavelength range of the camera one of several compatible Princeton Instruments cameras without any moving parts The system is ideal for both general spectroscopy applications as well as Laser Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy PI LCX High performance photon counting system Medium X ray direct detection PI MAX ICCD design with internal high voltage power and gating Controller is ST 133 and gating timing is provided by a DG535 PTG or other TTL timing source PI MAX2 High speed PI MAX ICCD design with internal high voltage power and gating Controller is ST 133 5MHz and gating timing is provided by a DG535 PTG or other TTL timing source PI MTE Compact high sensitivity digital imaging system designed to deliver scientific performance inside high vacuum chambers over long operation times PI SCX X ray diffraction fiberoptically coupled detector PI SX High sensitivity deep vacuum interface for soft X ray acquisition PIXIS Compact permanent vacuum camera platform with internal controller Designed for low light level spectroscopy and imaging PIXIS XO Compact vacuum open nose camera platform with internal controller and rotatable ConFlat flange Designed for direct imaging of very low energy X ray lt 30 eV SPEC 10 High performance spectroscopy sys
167. ideo out so no interface card or software required As of Version 2 5 this detector will not be supported by WinView XP TE air cooled camera with lifetime vacuum can be run with ST 133 controllers Six speed digitization is an option 168 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 XTE TE air cooled detector with cooling down to 100 C can be run with ST 133 controllers Pulsers FG 100 Pulser with 5 nsec 3 usec gating Gen II intensifiers only FG 101 Obsolete version of an ICCD unit with internal high voltage power and gating PG 10 Pulser with 200 nsec to 6 msec gating Gen II intensifiers only PG200 Software programmable pulser with 5 nsec to 80 msec gating Highest performance pulser with the most features Gen II intensifiers only PTG Dedicated programmable delay generator board that generates TTL level pulses to control intensifier gating in PI MAX models It is an option that sits in the third slot of an ST 133 controller High Voltage Power Supplies IIC 100 High voltage power supply for intensified cameras without internal high voltage supplies intensified PentaMAX ITE or lens coupled intensified systems for CW operation only Not necessary for ICCD or PI MAX cameras For gated operation of intensified PentaMAX or ITE cameras buy the board version of the IITC 100 called the MCP 100 built into the pulser During manufacture a Model IIC 100 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III inte
168. ile on the Experiment Setup Processes tab page The ASCII Output Setup dialog box will open 4 Set the Delimiter and Line Termination Characters 5 Click on OK to save your entries and close the dialog Then click on Acquire or Focus to initiate data acquisition 6 At the end of the acquisition the TXT file will be saved automatically Depending on your data file entries Step 2 the acquired data may also be saved automatically as an SPE file or you can save it manually 88 WinView 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 Chapter 7 Cleaning Introduction An acquisition is made up of an exposure period and a readout period For the rest of the time the camera is waiting to be told to acquire images During this waiting period charge generated from different sources builds up on the array unless some kind of cleaning process is ongoing Cleaning minimizes the impact of the unwanted signal noise by row shifting the accumulated charge to the output register and then discarding it Depending on your system WinView 32 will provide you with up to five cleaning features The most common cleaning feature is Clean Cycles which occur until Acquire is selected and may continue up to the entered number of cleans before exposure begins If External Synchronization is being used to control exposure a feature called continuous cleans may be used in addition to the standard clean cycles Where the camera and contr
169. iles Loads the Help System both general and context sensitive Help PCI Interface Loads the drivers for the PCI Interface card Sample SPE Data Files Creates a directory Data containing sample SPE files This directory is located beneath the one containing the WinView 32 files Diagnostic Program Loads the diagnostics program pidiag32 exe It is located in the directory containing the WinView 32 application files and can be executed by double clicking on pidiag32 exe via the Windows Explorer 22 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Pulser Support Loads the pulser drivers Currently supported pulsers include the PTG the PG200 and the DG535 Timing Generator drives the PI MAX pulsing circuits Snap Ins Loads the selected Snap In files When a Snap In is installed its button will be added to the Snap In toolbar PI Screen Saver Loads the PI Screen Saver PI Shell Extension Provides additional SPE file properties pages Right click on SPE file name and select Properties With PI Shell Extension deselected only the standard Windows 95 file property page will appear With PI Shell Extension selected additional property pages will appear Visual Basic User Interface Allows DLLs programmed using Visual Basic 5 or higher to be executed from WinView 32 Options Allows you to install or uninstall the Imaging option Installing the PCI Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows NT 2000 and XP to i
170. ill need to manually enter the information Note Because Marconi changed its name to e2v you may see CCD types with the prefix MAR EEV or e2v These CCDs are manufactured by e2v Controller Type Camera CCD Type 2D OMA V 320 ST 133 5 MHz XEN 320 I PentaMAX Gen II or Gen III PentaMAX JEEV 512x512FT fee E eee eee S ca Saat casa Does not support NVRAM function 163 164 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 a ey eR a ee es i ay A ce eee PI MTE 1300B ST 133 ST 133 2 EEV 1300x1340B MHz PI SCX 1242 ST 133 EEV 1152x1242 6 ph PI SCX 1300 ST 133 EEV 1300x1340F PI SCX 4300 ST 133 KAF 2084x2084 SCX PI SX 400 ST 133 EEV 400x1340B PI SX 512 ST 133 TEK 512x512DB PI SX 1024 ST 133 TEK 1024x1024DB PI SX 1300 ST 133 EEV 1300x1340B PIXIS 100F B BR R INA BEV 100x1340F B PIXIS 400F B BR R INA SBE 400x1340F B System PIXIS 512F B PIXIS 1024F B PIXIS XO 100B PIXIS XO 400B PIXIS XO 512B PIXIS XO 1024B PIXIS XO 2KB Spec 10 100 B R BR Spec 10 120 Spec 10 120B Spec 10 256 B E Spec 10 400 B R BR Spec 10 100 B R BR Spec 10 400 B R BR SpectruMM 120 SpectruMM 120B SpectruMM 250 SpectruMM 250B VersArray 512B F VersArray 1024B F VersArray 1300B F VersArray 512B F VersArray 1K KB System and Camera Nomenclature 165 NA Masson NA EEV 1024x1028 CCD aro ay a eerrarn ao pe MAO oe WA_____ SE CODTT 00 WA 2 1024x1028 CCD 7 10 NA Pa
171. in that the full resolution of the image is retained Many text editors and graphics programs allow images to be pasted directly from the clipboard Paint Shop Pro a shareware program is one example of an inexpensive program that can edit and save clipboard screen shots 1 Open the application Open a new file within that application 2 Select Paste from the Edit menu This will place the contents of the clipboard into the application If the image seems cut off try opening a bigger blank image before pasting the clipboard The image is now an 8 bit color or grayscale image 3 Crop the image if desired This feature is available in almost any image editing program 4 Select Print from the File menu Print the file 5 Save the file if desired TIFF is an excellent image format for either grayscale or color shots Note Screen capture images lose the high dynamic range of the original The Copy function Ctrl C retains the full resolution of the data file 132 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Saving as TIF and Printing It is also possible to save an image file directly to 8 bit Tif or 16 bit TIFF format by using the Save As function on the File menu The resulting file could then be copied to a graphics editing program for further processing and then printed Images saved as 8 bit Tif can be opened with a variety of programs for example Imaging for Windows Kodak Microsoft Paint Jasc Paint Shop Pro or Adobe P
172. individual pulses within a burst When both of these modes are active you must select Main Burst for the Bracket Start Select Bracket Pulsing On or Off Note Bracket pulsing is only useful in low duty factor gated measurements in the UV with the PI MAX camera See your PI MAX system manual for detailed information If you select Bracket Pulsing ON next select the Bracket Start appropriate to your setup Keep in mind that the on off switching of the MCP bracket pulsing is slow taking about 500 ns to turn on and 200 ns to turn off The Bracket Start choices are Main Main times the bracket start from the main trigger either an external or an internal trigger Select this if the event of interest will occur at least 1 us after the main trigger the 1 us includes the 500 ns required to turn the MCP fully on e Main Burst Select this if Burst mode is active Brackets an entire burst but not the individual pulses within a burst Pre Trigger Allows you to capture an event that would otherwise occur while the MCP was turning on This selection requires that in addition to the main trigger at Ext Trig In you trigger the PTG by a pulse applied to the Pre Trig In BNC The pre trigger must be at least 525 ns before the main trigger After an insertion delay of approximately 25 ns the MCP will be gated on before the main trigger occurs The main trigger plus the gate delay and width parameters determine the photocathode gating and th
173. iolations have occurred Check interface cable ecescescesseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeaeens 199 Appendix G GIOSS ANY siisii iieii acceeecaatnsadetaieantensansicenacaddventiaaadeestdcines 201 Warranty amp Service sssssssssnennneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnana nna 203 Limited Warranty nde rie ia lane E a E E a EEE E Da 203 Contact Information siate rsr a a a E A aE eai 206 NING a E E E T AT 207 Figures Figure 1 RSConfig dialog bOX cccccccesccesscesseeeseceeceseeseecseeeseeeesseeeaeecssecsaecsaecnseceseenaeens 24 Figure 2 Opening WinView 32 from the Program Manager cscceseseesceeeeneeereeae 25 Figure 32S plashsereenssss secs curs faa ae aae ea dsheel st eatatvs aaaea aaa aaa stands 25 Figure 4 Main WinView 32 Window c scsscsscesessreescesecseeeceeseceaeeaeesecaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeeneeaes 26 Fig re Sis Setup IMEMU ses szsessnsseavees osha nee e cancauaseansasantanncestonestdebean stag Oh a E 27 Figure 6 Possible System Configurations cccccsccescssssceesceeseeeseeeseeeeeceeeeecnseceaeenaeens 28 Figure 7 Air Cooled System with Internal Controller Diagram cceceeseeteeteees 28 Figure 8 Liquid or Air Cooled System with External Controller Diagram 29 Figure 9 Cryo Cooled System with External Controller Diagram eceeeeeereeeee 29 Figure 10 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome dialog DOX ceceseeeeeeteeeeeereeeeeee 30 Figur
174. ions stated in the hardware manuals before making this selection Click the Apply Changed Settings button This writes all changed parameters to the PG200 It may take several seconds depending on the number of parameters that have been changed To set all of the parameters click on the Apply All Settings button Click on OK to close the dialog box Chapter 14 Pulser Operation 137 Programmable Timing Generator PTG Unlike the PG200 and the DG535 the PTG is not a free standing instrument but rather a plug in module designed for installation in a special version of the ST 133 Controller This novel and highly integrated approach to timing generator design with its advanced high speed electronics low insertion delay and programmable functions achieves superior performance as the ultimate gate controller for the PI MAX Intensified Camera Basic PTG operation is reviewed in the following procedure The individual tab page selections are discussed in detail in the online Help topics Note The gate functions of the PI MAX camera are controlled by the PTG If the system is equipped with a PI MAX camera the Camera State dialog box Figure 129 will appear when the software is started Although the software always initially places the PI MAX in Safe mode you have the option of restarting with the last setting Shutter Mode or Gate Mode Camera State xi Camera Has Been Set To Sate Mode Select The Desited Action Restore T
175. is defined by dragging the mouse cursor the region coordinates length and height will also be reported You may have to lengthen the Information box for all this information to appear a EI Pixel 310 Intensity 540243 00 point 310 strip 28 frame 1 Figure 67 Graphical Display with Information box Note When you open the information box it becomes the active window To perform operations in the data display window such as changing the selected strip you must again make the data display window active by clicking the mouse cursor anywhere in the data box The data window title bar will become highlighted indicating that it is the active window and the cursor positioning functions will become operative again The data displayed in the information box will continue to be updated automatically Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 75 aes aa Se a Single Strip Open the Display Layout dialog box by selecting Layout on the Display menu 2 On the General tab page with Auto Select unselected click on the Display Type Graph radio button and then on OK The single data curve for the strip on which the cursor is positioned will be displayed lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 NE Pixel 310 Intensity 540243 00 point 310 strip 28 frame 1 Q Q a Figure 68 Single Strip displayed graphically 3 Try operating the cursor positioning keys to demonstrate their effect The left right arrow key move the cursor along the strip and the up down
176. isplayed as desired releasing the mouse button will cause the entire data set to be displayed with the new orientation TIP Since you can move the cursor outside the data window reducing the data window size before adjusting the Z axis will give you greater range of motion while dragging the axis 2 Click on OK The data should be redisplayed as shown in Figure 70 with the hidden surface darker lines clearly visible Moon4_spe 275 X 387 X 1 Pixel 131 Intensity 4563 00 point 131 strip 200 frame 1 HCA Figure 70 3D Plot with Hidden Surfaces Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 79 If the hidden surfaces aren t clearly delineated it may be necessary to change the color assigned to them which should be different from the normal graph and background colors The Normal Hidden Surface button on the Display Layout Color tab page allows the hidden surface color to be selected Note that the Marker Hidden Surface button allows the color of the marker curves in hidden surface regions to be set Opening the Display Layout dialog box With the image still open select Layout from the Display menu The Display Layout dialog box will open Figure 71 Note that you can also access the Display Layout dialog box by clicking on the Display Layout button of the Open dialog box Viewing Axes and Cross Sections 1 On the General tab page select Axes Horizontal Axes Vertical Cross Sections Horizontal and Cross Sectio
177. ive area or being transferred to the shift register By default if there are no Pre Dummy rows the serial register will be cleared before rows are shifted If the Skip Serial Register Clean box is selected when there are no Pre Dummy rows the register cleanout will be skipped and the chip readout will be faster This feature is not available for PVCAM supported cameras Custom Timing WXCstTim opt Caution Notes 1 Fully supported by WinView Version 2 5 18 1 and higher 2 This option is not supported for 5 MHz systems Introduction Hardware Setup 1133 If this option has been installed Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Custom Timing selecting Show Custom Timing ADC Type X checkbox on the Controller Camera ial or Controller Detector tab page Default Timing From 1MHz gt adds the Custom Timing tab page to the dialog box The Custom Timing todeta Timna selections are shown in Figure 149 p Head The default timing parameter values Bi oh Active Thomson have been determined to give the fastest possible performance l l without compromising data ana Fala acquisition performance Phase E a Phase B H Princeton Instruments does not Clock fe Clock B 4 encourage users to change these parameter settings For most Clock Rate usec 6 4 Clock Rate nsec 50 applications the default settings Shift per Row usec 153 8 Shift per Pixel nsec 100 will g
178. ive the best results We strongly advise contacting the factory for guidance before customizing the chip timing parameters OK Cancel Help Figure 149 Custom Timing tab page FITS FITS exe FITS Flexible Image Transport System is the data format most widely used within astronomy for transporting analyzing and archiving scientific data files FITS is primarily designed to store scientific data sets consisting of multidimensional arrays images and 2 dimensional tables organized into rows and columns of information The FITS option allows you to acquire and save WinView 32 data in the FITS format This option also provides a file conversion function that allows you to convert existing WinView 32 SPE data files into the FITS format F1 help is included with the option Chapter 16 Software Options 155 Acquiring data in the FITS format starts with setting up the experiment parameters in WinView 32 With WinView still open you then open the FITS exe program by opening it at its directory location or by opening it from the Execute Macro dialog box if the Macro option has been installed When you click on Run Experiment on the FITS dialog box the experiment will begin At completion of the experiment the data will be displayed in WinView and a FITS file will automatically be generated and saved Note When this option is installed the FITS exe file is placed in the same directory as the WinView exe file ij WinX 32
179. ixel selection but not the strip Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Figure 64 Hid lamp spe 3 D Graph 7 Press the Insert key repeatedly Each time it is pressed the display expands about the cursor position Then press the Delete key repeatedly to contract the display restoring the appearance of the data display Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 73 8 Note the cross sectional displays in Figure 64 The vertical cross section profiles the intensity at the same point on each successive strip The horizontal cross section profiles the intensity at each point on the same strip If the large cursor is selected cursor projections will intersect the cross section to show indicate the cursor position These projections may not be visually aligned with the cursor position on the main plot This effect will be particularly noticeable with a long Z axis Because of perspective effects the higher numbered strips will be further away and visually smaller The axes automatically adjust so that they read true for the strip on which the cursor is located However because the cross section profiles expand to use all of the available space they will not be in alignment visually with the cursor The profile shapes will be correct and the point on the profiles intersected by the large cross hair extensions will accurately indicate the cursor position Also the information box will accurately report the pixel number and intensity at the cursor position 5 95
180. licking on Customize Toolbar in the Setup menu 2 Referring to Figure 147 note that buttons already on the toolbar are listed on the right Available but unused buttons are listed on the left 3 To remove an available button from the Custom Toolbar first select it from the right hand list You may have to scroll through the listed buttons to find the one you want 4 Click on the Remove button The button will disappear from the list of Toolbar buttons and will be added to the list of Available buttons 5 Click on Close to close the dialog box Individual Dialog Item Descriptions Available Buttons You can select the button you wish to add to the Custom Toolbar from this section Many buttons each with its own preassigned function as described below are available Toolbar Buttons These are the buttons that will actually appear on the Custom Toolbar Add Causes the selected button on the Available buttons list to be transferred to the Toolbar buttons list before the selected button Remove Causes the selected button on the Toolbar list to be transferred to the Available Buttons list Close This button closes the Custom Toolbar Assignment dialog box and implements changes made to the Custom Toolbar Reset Restores the default Custom Toolbar configuration Help Opens the context sensitive help for the Custom Toolbar Chapter 15 Custom Toolbar Settings 151 Move Up Together with Move Down Move Up determines the po
181. ly as the Sequential Gating Setup x Gate Width Gate Del Linear is suited to sweeping 7 i 5 i jumber ot i p over a time interval to locate Images a Stat 500 nsec e stat foo S frec and recover and event that i SJ End food nsec End ooon nsec takes place at the same time I Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed with each iteration _ measurement progresses Increment Type C Fired j Fast Decay Slow Decay Time Constant 1 usec Time Constant 10 usec Amplitude 0 Amplitude 10 View Width Delay Sequence W Sav Sequence Values ToFile Setup File Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower Saltware Accumulations following a logarithmic ae ri Exposure s curve as the experiment progresses The resulting Cancel Hs data points can be spline fitted to generate the Figure 141 Sequential Gating Setup dialog box Chapter 14 Pulser Operation 143 complete curve so that the decay constant can be calculated even where the data derives from two decay processes occurring simultaneously If the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters see Sequential Mode Parameters on page 143 for more information as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The
182. m change to reflect the change in the Gaussian transfer function See the online Help for a detailed discussion of the palette and Grapsnele transfer function options Color 1 Change the brightness and _T bnvetted Palette Type contrast settings to obtain the rae ok most pleasing image display Note that clicking on the small Cancel Help square above the Brightness scale and above the Contrast scale will Figure 48 Brightness Contrast dialog box restore the default brightness and contrast values 50 Try different Function and Palette Type selections to see the effect on the displayed image Note that the displayed curve will also change reflecting the change in the brightness transfer function Until you gain more operating experience we suggest you leave the Function Type set to Linear the Palette to Grayscale and the Brightness and Contrast both to 50 Click on OK to close the box Any setting changes will be applied Chapter 5 Displaying the Data Selecting a Region of Interest 1 Using the mouse position the cursor at one comer of the region to be defined depress the left mouse button drag the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner and release the mouse button Refer to Figure 49 Click on the Ql Zoom In button The view will change so that only the selected region is displayed as shown in Figure 50 Note The Display Layout Cursor tab page allows you to change how th
183. m controller type and camera type terminology provided in Appendix A and e data structure information provided in Appendix B Also included are appendices that address repair and maintenance of the WinView 32 software and installation work arounds for situations where the CD ROM doesn t support long file names A software hardware setup wizard guides you through the critical hardware selections the first time you select Setup Hardware To properly respond to the wizard s queries you may have to refer to your ordering information such as exact camera model A D converters etc Keep this information handy Even though the wizard will assist you in getting started it will still be necessary to read through this manual to familiarize yourself with the many data collection and analysis options available Note Throughout the manual references are made to the PI MAX camera detector This camera detector was previously called the I MAX and the ICCD MAX Summary of Chapter Information Part 1 Getting Started Introduction describes the contents of this manual as well as other information sources including online Help and other documentation files Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinView 32 lists system requirements and describes how to install the WinView 32 software Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup provides detailed instructions on how to configure WinView 32 for operation with the hardware camera and controller in your pa
184. mputers purchased from Princeton Instruments are shipped with the card installed e Minimum of 32 Mbyte total RAM for CCDs up to 1 4 million pixels Collecting larger images at full frame or at high speed may require 128 Mbytes or more of RAM e Hard disk with a minimum of 80 Mbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 17 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data storage Collection of large images may require additional hard disk storage depending on the number of images collected and their size Disk level compression programs are not recommended ATTENTION Not all computers are able to satisfy the software and data transfer performance requirements of Princeton Instruments systems If you purchased a computer through Princeton Instruments it will have already been tested for proper operation with a Princeton Instruments system and will have the Interface card installed 17 18 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 256 colors with at least 1 Mbyte of memory Memory required will depend on desired display resolution Two button Microsoft compatible serial mouse or Logitech three button serial bus mouse e Host Computer USB 2 0 Protocol AT compatible computer with Pentium 3 or better processor that runs at GHz or better Native USB 2 0 support on the motherboard or USB Interface Card Orange Micro 70USB90011 USB2 0 PCI is recommended
185. must confirm BitAdjust Cip 1 LSB that the internal hardware jumpers of their controller are properly set for the ADC Offset 50 desired speed See the ST 130 manual for details Analog Gain Low 1x z Type For systems having more than one A D converter both FAST and SLOW Acquire Focus Cancel Help will be available Make this selection Figure 30 Generic ADC tab page before selecting the rate or resolution Controller Gain PentaMAX only Set to Gain 3 Resolution Number of bits Choices limited by A D type selection Bit Adjust ST 138 only Set to No Clip ADC Offset ST 133 5MHz only Use the default setting Analog Gain ST 133 Medium Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that do not apply to your system 6 No ROI Setup tab page parameters need to be changed WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 7 No Processes tab page functions should be selected 8 On the Data File tab page make the following selections ADC Timing Processes Save Load n Daafie aT Auto Increment File Name Enable a aFie Ol Setup Data Conections Data File Name should be OFF in Overwrite Append Existing Files Select Overwrite data file will overwrite Auto Increment File Name an existing file having the same name T Enae Cmi fr A Overwrite Confirmation Check this box z Sita aan x Overwnte Appen Data Type so that you
186. n Autoscale The display will autorange to the intensity range in the defined region The effect will be an increase in contrast in the observed image Throughout the image pixels darker or lighter than those in the defined region will be displayed as black or white Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 81 3 Click the mouse anywhere in the displayed image and click o again to restore the original image view Relabeling the Axes Display Layout Circuit_spe 268 X 248 X 1 x 1 Open the Display Layout General Range Color Axes 30 Layout Image Layout Cursor dialog box and open the Axes tab page Figure 76 Note M Horizontal Axis Calibration On C of that Horizontal Axis Vertical M Label Units itl x Axis and the Label box for Davoni TT each are all checked If unchecked the corresponding M Vertical Axis axis or label would not be M Label displayed Stip 2 Change the axis label for both axes Then click on OK The T Save as Default Caneel Help displayed axes will no longer be named Pixel and Strip but Figure 76 Axes tab page rather the new labels 3 Try selecting different fonts to see the effect Only True type or Type 1 Postscript fonts will work correctly Open the Fonts dialog box change the various font choices and click on OK t Sarol twice To return to the a z Strikeout original font choices select C Unea AaBbYyZz 10 pt Arial Regular Totor HB Black v Seript
187. n click on the adjacent Setup button Triggers Gating Aus Trig Dut Version 2 5 Repetitive Mode ot Rahat If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive p T Setup Gating setup dialog box will appear as Renee Bone ak shown in Figure 133 In the Repetitive Burst Mode Aalst e gating mode the Gate Width and Gate CoN oF 7 i aieiai Delay remain constant over the course Number oaee rs x pz wee 3 of the measurement If operating in the Pea famm H ye Aniicpatia Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Gate Width and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Setup dialog box will close and you will return to the PTG dialog box cae ae Figure 132 PTG Gating tab page Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 134 In the Sequential g i Gate Width Gate Delay Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate From TA Out Delay do not remain constant but mi frec 15625 nsec z change either linearly Fixed or Hl exponentially as the measurement j oi N l jaci Sea ates Per Exposure epe elay for rogresses prog fi 1 Exposure s Cancel Help Figure 133 Repetitive Gating Setup Sequential Gating Setup Gate width Gate Delay Number of Images Start E fusec z Start fi fusec pa 4i zl nd E 5 fusec x End
188. n the Kinetics mode Setting a lower value increases the shift speed A higher value gives a slower shift If the shift is too fast not all of the charge will be transferred If too slow image smearing will be increased due to the exposure that takes place while the transfer is in progress The default value gives good results in most measurements Note If you are using a PVCAM supported camera this parameter is hidden because the shift time is being adjusted via the Vertical Shift nsec row up down arrows Window Size Determines the height of the window for Kinetics mode The window size must be at least 1 row and less than or equal to the maximum number of rows for the array MPP This check box may appear if the CCD array is designed for MPP multi pinned phase operation When this box is checked the array will be run in MPP mode Some MPP capable arrays can also be run in Non MPP mode MPP box is unchecked Running in Non MPP mode may result in higher dark current in addition to larger full well capacity Note MPP capability reduces the rate of dark current generation by a factor of 20 or more and thus relaxes CCD cooling requirements to the level where a thermoelectric cooler is sufficient for most applications LOGIC OUT Output The choices for the signal provided at the controller s SCAN Output connector vary based on the selected Controller If the LOGIC OUT field doesn t appear on the tab page the choice of output m
189. nd current that flows in a charge coupled device or image intensifier of a camera system Cooling the photodetector s primary imaging surface 1 e the CCD s photoconductor or the image intensifier s photocathode can reduce or eliminate dark current Also called thermally generated charge Dark current can be subtracted from an image Gating In an intensified camera system the application of a voltage that switches the image intensifier on and off in very short intervals Gating improves temporal resolution Gating can be controlled by the programmed exposure time Shutter Mode or is determined by the Pulser settings Gate Mode Help button Opens the context sensitive help for the active tab page or dialog box Host computer The primary or controlling computer for a camera Mouse button Allows you to specify a region to be processed using the mouse Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region Note that the Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected MPP Multi pinned phase operation A mode that reduces the rate of dark current generation by a factor of 20 or more relaxing CCD cooling requirements to the level where a thermoelectric cooler is sufficient for most applications Also called inverted operation NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory NVRAM contains factory programmed information about t
190. nd used in the polynom_coeff char polynom_order 3101 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM char calib_count 3102 valid calibration data pairs double pixel_position 10 3103 pixel pos of calibration data double calib_value 10 3183 calibration VALUE at above pos double polynom_coeff 6 3263 polynom COEFFICIENTS double laser_position 3311 laser wavenumber for relativ WN char reserved3 3319 reserved BYTE new_calib_flag 3320 If set to 200 valid label below char calib_label 81 3321 Calibration label NULL term d char expansion 87 3402 Calibration Expansion area Start of Y Calibration Structure 3489 3977 double offset 3489 offset for absolute data scaling double factor 3497 factor for absolute data scaling char current_unit 3505 selected scaling unit char reservedl 3506 reserved char string 40 3507 special string for scaling char reserved2 40 3547 reserved char calib_valid 3587 flag if calibration is valid char input_unit 3588 current input units for calib_value char polynom_unit 3589 linear UNIT and used in the polynom_coeff char polynom_order 3590 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM char calib_count 3591 valid calibration data pairs double pixel_position 10 3592 pixel pos of calibration data double calib_value 10 3672 calibration VALUE at above pos Appendix B Data Structure 179 double polynom_coeff 6 3752 polynom COEFFICIENTS double laser_position 3800 laser wavenumber for relativ WN char reser
191. ned Open HE according to Win 95 conventions as ELS OE follows m Ea 256stip SPE 1 Select Open from the File menu The sce File Open dialog box will appear i dead Figure 37 E Argont spe 2 Open the directory containing the Ej data files Clicking on the button at fFienm the right of the Look In field opens a Fiesethse wrx Data spe x Baneel browser function allowing you to quickly and easily access the correct me ee s Auto Select or Display Layout folder As shown in Figure 37 the C Image f Graph 3D Graph pe data files will be listed below 3 Ifyou want the software to control Figure 37 Open dialog box how the data will be displayed when the file is opened check Auto Select Leave Auto Select unchecked if you want to retain control over whether the data will be displayed as an Image Graph or 3D Graph 55 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Auto Select is the factory default selection In addition one of the three radio buttons Image Graph or 3D Graph will be selected but grayed out if Auto Select is checked If Auto Select is unchecked the grayed out selection will become active and govern how the file is opened e When Auto Select is checked the way the data is displayed depends on the number of data strips it contains If there are eleven or more strips of data they will be displayed as a normal image such as that shown in Figure 43 page 61 If there are at least three data strip
192. ng in the External Cancel Download To DGS35 He trigger mode specify the Slope Threshold and Figure 138 DG535 Triggers tab page Termination appropriate for the trigger source 142 12 13 WinView 32 Manual Click on the Gating tab to bring the Gating tab page to the front Version 2 5 DG535 X Triggers Gating Comm Part Bracket Pulsing C ON DFF Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Gating setup dialog box will appear Figure 140 In this mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay remain constant over the course of the measurement If operating in the Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Gate Width and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Setup dialog box will close and EETA EEE x you will return to the DG535 Gate Width Gate Delay dialog box 500 z nsec x 1000 nsec Software Accumulations Repeat Width Delay for fi Exposure s Cancel Help Figure 140 Repetitive Gating Setup Cancel Download To Desa Help Figure 139 DG535 Gating tab page Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 141 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly or exponential
193. ns Vertical Refer to the online Help for additional information on Axes and Cross Sections Click on the Range tab to move the Range tab page Figure 72 to the front Initial Autoscale and Set to Full Range should be selected The Frame number should be 1 Click on the OK button The Display Layout dialog box will close Click on the Autoscale button at the bottom of the image window Then select the large cursor by clicking on Cursor on the View menu and then on Large as shown in Figure 73 Default Display Layout x General Flange Color Akes 9D Layout Image Layout Cursor Display Type Axes Cross Sections I Auto Select IV Horizontal MV Horizontal V Vertical M Vertical T Info Bar Tool Bar I Keep Window Placement Figure 71 Display Layout dialog box Default Display Layout x General Fange Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor pinten m Frame kan o M e E fom pas pojes he an x js to ae Units Pixel ri i to 0 a step of a Initial Full Range Cancel Help Figure 72 Range tab page T Set to Full Range Te Sse se eran View Acquisition Display Tools Toolbars v Status Bar Info v Axes v Cross Sections None Small v Lage Figure 73 Selecting the Large Cursor 80 WinView 32 Manual 5 The display should now appear as shown in Figure 74 The axes will be labeled in ima
194. nsifier but not for operation with both types IIC 200 Compact high voltage power supply for intensified cameras without internal high voltage supplies intensified PentaMAX ITE or lens coupled intensified systems for gated and CW Shutter operation During manufacture a Model IIC 200 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III intensifier but not for operation with both types IIC 300 Combined image intensifier power supply and moderate performance gating pulse generator Gated and CW Shutter operation PIV version available During manufacture a Model IIC 300 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III intensifier but not for operation with both types Miscellaneous Components OFA An adapter for connecting a fiber optic input to a spectrometer Two versions are available for the best possible f matching see the price list for details CC 100 Closed coolant circulator not a chiller designed for TE TEA or ICCD cameras UV Lens f 1 2 catadioptric lens only for ICCD or PI MAX cameras CCD Array Designators In the past the designators in the following list were often used on camera serial labels to identify the CCD array in the camera B Back illuminated CCD DDA Dual diode array CCD F Front illuminated CCD in many cases no letter is used Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 169 E CCD made by EEV T CCD made by Thomson K CCD made by Kodak H
195. nstall software and hardware Before installing the Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card in your computer turn the computer off Follow the instructions supplied with your computer for installing an internal card and install the PCI card After you have secured the card in the computer and replaced the cover turn the computer on When Windows boots it will try to install the new hardware If it cannot locate the driver you will be prompted to enter the directory path either by keyboard entry or by using the browse function If you selected AUTO PCI WinView 32 automatically put the required INF file into the Windows INF directory and put the PCI card driver file in the Windows System32 Drivers directory Windows PCI INF Filename PCI Device Driver Name Version Located in Windows INF Located in Windows System32 Drivers directory directory Windows 2000 rspi inf in WINNT INF for rspipci sys in WINNT System32 Drivers and XP example for example Windows NT N A pi_pci sys Windows 95 98 pii inf pivxdpci vxd and Windows ME The INF directory may be hidden Table 1 PCI Driver Files and Locations Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinView 32 23 Installing the USB 2 0 Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows NT 2000 and XP to install software and hardware Before installing the Princeton Instruments USB2 Interface we recommend that you
196. nual Version 2 5 Controller Is Not Responding If this message pops up when you click on OK after selecting the Interface Type during Hardware Setup under the WinView 32 Setup menu the system has not been able to communicate with the Controller Check to see if Controller has been turned ON and if the interface card its driver and the interface cable have been installed e Ifthe Controller is ON the problem may be with the interface card its driver interrupt or address conflicts or the cable connections e Ifthe interface card is not installed close the application program and turn the Controller OFF Follow the interface card installation instructions in provided with your interface card and cable the card to the SERIAL COM port on the rear of the Controller Then do a Custom installation of WinView 32 with the appropriate interface component selected PCI Interface or ISA Interface depending on the interface card type Be sure to deselect the interface component that does not apply to your system Note WinX versions 2 6 0 and higher does not support the ISA interface e Ifthe interface card is installed in the computer and is cabled to the SERIAL COM port on the rear of the Controller close the application program and turn the Controller OFF Check the cable connections and tighten the locking screws if the connections are loose e Ifthe interface card was installed after WinView 32 has been installed close that ap
197. o disk repeat Step 2 This completes initial data acquisition with an ST 133 Controller Chapter 3 Initial Data Collection 53 PentaMAX Controller The procedure that follows for the PentaMAX Controller is in two parts Focusing and Data Collection In focusing images are displayed on the video monitor and no data is collected This allows rapid and easy adjustment of the system optics Once the settings have been optimized focus mode operation should be ended and data collection performed Focusing This procedure applies for a PentaMAX system that includes a video monitor connected to the Video port BNC of the PentaMAX If your system doesn t include a video monitor go to the Data Collection All Controllers section which begins on page 54 Select Video from the Interactive Operation 4 Interactive Camera Operation x Acquisition menu p Hardware LUT Exposure Time Patter This will allow live datato MH seconds Zoom pw z lui agi be displayed on your video salut i rie Hs oy a rT ofl s monitor r Exposure Control l rea ER j p occa fec ra S r Select Video Focus from 5 i E Deaan the Acquisition Menu Thi Hardware LUT s equ Siuo e u e Set Exposure Interactive Operation dialog Gamma 7 r Focus Control sawr box that will be displayed depends on the PentaMAX RN Estar l version Version 5 and Cancel Help Run se higher will
198. o Last Setting Figure 129 Camera State dialog box Following the intensifier precautions stated in EE the hardware manuals turn on the Controller p Select Active Pulser PTG installed If the Controller isn t turned C PG200 C DG53 on the WinView 32 software won t be able to control the PTG On the Setup menu select Pulsers to open the Pulsers dialog box Select PTG Then click on the Setup Pulser button The PTG dialog box Figure 131 will open If PTG is grayed out on the Pulsers dialog box PTG support has not been installed Select the Trigger mode either PTG Internal in which the PTG free runs or External in which it is triggered from an external source Chess 7 fa 7 If operating in the Internal trigger SS mode set the trigger Frequency in Threshold 4 H vats Hz Slope Coupling Termination If operating in the External trigger Eemal Positive CAC High Negative DC 50 Ohms mode specify the Threshold Slope Coupling Termination and Gate iste ister Fror Ext Trigger Delay From appropriate for the oe Net alls trigger source Note that the gate delay from the TO connector is approximately 24 ns Triggers Gating Aux Trig Cut r Input Trigger Mode Figure 130 Pulsers dialog box coc tte Click on the Gating tab Figure 132 Figure 131 PTG Triggers tab page WinView 32 Manual 8 Select Repetitive or Sequential and the
199. o Page Causes two pages to be displayed at a time in a side by side layout Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the previewed page allowing a selected area to be examined in detail There are two zoom levels Note that if not at full zoom the cursor becomes a magnifying glass if positioned on the image area Zoom Out Allows you to return to the normal unzoomed preview display Close Closes the Preview window and returns you to the normal WinView 32 display Printing a Screen Capture It is also possible to do a screen capture of the entire WinView 32 window This is the best way to capture such information as cross sections scaling and color lookup tables A limitation of screen shots is that the resulting image is based on the resolution of the monitor not the resolution of the image For a 1 million pixel CCD even a 600 x 800 video mode is not enough to show all the pixel information 1 Display the desired image or images in WinView 32 Click once on the title bar of WinView 32 to make this the active window 2 Press Alt Print Screen This copies the entire contents of the WinView 32 window including image or graph displays and dialog windows to the clipboard Note Alternatively press Ctrl C or select Copy on the Edit menu to copy an image to the clipboard This function only works on image displays and only on the image itself i e scales and cross section information is not transferred However it has an advantage
200. of the frames processed to the Output File X and Y Range You can specify the input file pixels to be processed The default is to process all pixels You additionally have the option of restricting the X and Y pixel range data written to the Output File An alternative way to specify a region is to use the mouse to define the region on the active data display of the input file and then click on Mouse Input Output Filename All three tab pages have a field for entering the filename In each case there is a button at the end of the box which when pressed opens a browser to make selecting and specifying filenames and locations as simple as possible In the case of the B tab page there is additionally a field for entering a constant Radio buttons are provided that activate one or the 105 106 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 other of the two fields Either a constant value or a filename can be entered but not both Data Type For the A and B tab pages the data type is reported only and cannot be changed In the case of the C output tab page you can specify the data type Data types include Byte 8 bits only the eight least significant data bits levels 0 to 255 will be saved Unint Unsigned integer 16 bits 0 to 65535 Int Signed integer 16 bits 32768 to 32767 Long Signed integer 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Float Floating point 32 bits 1 75494351e to 3 402823466 e Display Result This checkb
201. og DOX ccceceesceteceteceteeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeenaes 192 RSConfig dialog DOX cccccecssecsseesceeseeesecesecesecesecesecseeceeeeeeeeseseeeseeeneeeaaes 192 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog DOX ccccccsccessceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaaes 193 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog DOX ccccccescceseceteceteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenes 193 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles ccccecscesscesseeeteeeseeeteeenseeaaes 194 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog DOX cccceesesseeesceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeneeenaes 194 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles ccccecscessesteeeeeeeneeeteeeseeesaes 195 Error Creating Controller dialog boxes cecccesccessceeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeaaes 196 Hardware Wizard Detector Camera CCD dialog bOX ecceesceseeeseees 196 Program Error dialog DOX cccscccssecsseesseceeceecnseceeeseeceeeeeeseeeaeesseeeeeeaaes 198 Tables WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Figure 170 Serial Violations Have Occurred dialog DOX ecceeeseeteeeeeeeeeteceeeeeeeeees 199 Table 1 PCI Driver Files and Locations 0 ceccceceescesecsseeseeeceececeeseeeeceaeeaeeerceaeeaeeeneeaes 22 Table 2 USB Driver Files and Locations 00 cccceesseseesseeseeececeeseeseeeceaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeeneeaes 23 Table 3 Cursor Appearance and Behavior for Images and Graphs eeceeeeeeeeeee 75 Table 4 Features Supported under USB 2 0 continued on next page cceceeeeeeee 187 Part 1 Getting Started MVEEO C
202. ograph Slit Position Units SpecGrooves 650 Spectrograph Grating Grooves srccmp 654 number of source comp diodes Appendix B O bs ie hor hor hor ong ong loa hor har har hort ct ct ct ct ct DAANMEREEDAN hort har hort har har har qaqaqgaaunan har WOR NNNnNnNHnHMHNHNOOA Hope 0 O DKD Merat er ee too ct ct short O Ce N ooo Data Structure 177 ydim scramble ContinuousCleansFlag ExternalTriggerFlag inoscan lavgexp ReadoutTime TriggeredModeFlag Spare_2 10 sw_version FILEVERMAX type flatFieldApplied Spare_3 16 kin_trig_mode dlabel LABELMAX Spare_4 436 PulseFileName HDRNAMEMAX AbsorbFileName HDRNAMEMAX NumExpRepeats NumExpAccums YT_Flag clkspd_us HWaccumFlag StoreSync BlemishApplied CosmicApplied CosmicType CosmicThreshold NumFrames MaxIntensity MinIntensity ylabel LABELMAX ShutterType shutterComp readoutMode WindowSize clkspd interface_type NumROITsInExperiment Spare_5 16 controllerNum SWmade NumROI t ROIinfo startx endx groupx starty endy groupy 656 658 660 662 664 668 672 676 678 688 704 706 708 724 726 742 1178 1298 1422 1428 1434 1438 1442 1450 1458 1476 1482 1484 1486 1488 1490 1506 1508 1510 y dimension of raw data 0 scrambled 1 unscrambled T F Continuous Cleans Timing Option T F External Trigger Timing Option
203. oller support it a specialized version of continuous cleans Continuous Cleans Instruction can be used with the External Sync timing mode The readout of ROI information is enhanced by the Vertical Skips feature With Version 5 of the ST 133 Controller continuous cleans for Kinetics is also supported All of these cleaning features and their interrelationships are described in the sections that follow Clean Cycles The basic cleaning function is implemented by clean cycles These cycles start when you turn the controller on and a clean pattern is programmed into the controller Their purpose is to remove charge that accumulates on the array while the camera not acquiring data i e exposing and reading out the array The timing diagram below is for an experiment set up to acquire three 3 images in Freerun timing mode with normal shutter operation selected In this diagram clean cycles occur before the first exposure and after the last readout period Note The start of the exposure is signaled by NOT SCAN going high but will not occur until the current clean cycle has finished Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close a TS NOT SCANNERS Read Read Read EN l il l l l l texp ita tR l l l i i i Data Second i Data i Last i Data iFirst exposure stored exposure stored exposure stored Figure 83 Clean Cycles in Freerun Operation 89 WinView
204. ommend replacement of the USB 2 0 interface module with our TAXI interface module and Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card If this is not the case and data overruns continue to occur contact Customer Support see page 206 for contact information Demo is only Choice on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier If RSConfig exe has not been run and there is not an installed Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card the Hardware Wizard will only present the choice Demo in the Interface dialog box Figure 160 Clicking on Next presents an Error Creating Controller Error 129 message clicking on OK presents The Wizard Can Not Continue Without a Valid Selection message clicking on OK presents the Interface dialog box again 192 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Interface x Select the type of interface your system has C Cancel Help Figure 160 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog box At this point you will need to exit WinView and run the RSConfig exe program which creates a file called PVCAM INI This file contains information required to identify the interface camera and is referenced by the Hardware Wizard when you are setting up WinView 32 with USB for the first time l 2 3 If you have not already done so close WinView 32 Make sure the ST 133 is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on Run RSConfig from the Windows Start Programs PI Ac
205. omment field when OK is clicked The source comment field and the destination comment field can be different Clicking Remove existing labels will erase all previous labels from the display before adding the current label The Settings button brings up a dialog box with options for the label itself Figure 55 The Display Label nv filikecsd Label Settings dialog box allows you to change the color eel ee of the label text to choose between an opaque white raah Ee Background 7 Tee Transparent Opaque Cancel background and a transparent background and choose whether the labels are to run vertically or horizontally The opaque background works well with images where the label can get lost inside the image Figure 55 Label Options The simplest way to label a display would be to place subdialog box the ROI where the label should appear the origin AA starts at the top left corner of the ROI box right click 7 inside the ROI box type the label text and click OK Figure 56 shows a label as entered in the label text entry box Figure 57 shows the same label as it will appear with the data after clicking on OK Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 ol x This is the label Hg Argon o ajaj Figure 57 Data with Finished Label Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 69 Generally it is advisable to save the label in a comment field otherwise once the label is printed and the display is closed
206. on Selection cccccccccsssceseceteceseceseceeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeseeeseeesaees 105 Operatlons i e iit canned en eit tintin ane hast Ae anion aati Mee ile 106 Operation D sttiptions ssas men tek eel eR teeta taba code ete nie esha Shad 107 Procedure norki E dea cscs adenav ch E adevad tats cand seaneana vt band EEE eo E i 109 Chapter 11 Post Acquisition Mask ProCeSSes ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 Introd CtOniges seats c decerescaecs kes siteng ons ea eek beeen besa tate de Mines evant ead a a e a aod ela bee adeno 111 Edge Enhancement Sette ta feces a seeds dete e E dices uals aseauia eacee vas beatae ta anneenles 112 Sharpening Functions inian selec ca sevenee a E a A A saeneeoeaned 114 Smoothing FUNCHONS wa airea ok cased aa a t aa a a E a E eke et Stas 115 Morphological Functions ieee seee eee E EEEE E EEEE EE 116 CUSO RIE E sanns seas m aneen na eea ena An ite ES EE 118 Look Up Tabe a a E e A A A 119 EA I E AAEE E E AE EEE EE A E EE 121 Chapter 12 Additional Post Acquisition Processes cccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 Jah voy ob 19 0 a PAE ATE E EE EE E A 123 ee ee ee mnmr P 7 Threshold and Clipping isnon en a a a e a S a ess 124 C TOSS SCCHON EREE E A EE EE E AA ETS 125 Binning and SKIPPINg scicca iesi eei ia iia e E E eavtbendss 126 Histogram Calculation a a a a e a E A RRs 128 Chapter 13 PAUN rra r lore ce chance ae aar atic cece Aaa S aa eae Aa a eaan agaat eanan 129 Introductio seei E
207. on is reviewed in the following procedure 1 Make sure the PG200 is connected to one of the serial ports of the computer Later you will tell WinView 32 the name of this port COM1 COM2 etc The software cannot automatically detect the location of the PG200 2 Following the intensifier precautions listed in the hardware manuals turn on the PG200 Pulser and wait for it to initialize If the PG200 isn t turned on the WinView 32 software cannot program it 3 Select Setup then Pulsers then PG200 Then click on the Setup PG200 button to open the PG200 dialog If PG200 is grayed out on the Pulsers dialog box PG200 pulser support has not been installed 4 Click on the Comm Port tab 5 Select the Comm Port type Serial or Demo Serial must be selected to control the PG200 133 134 10 WinView 32 Manual Select the PG200 Comm Port Generally the mouse is connected to COM 1 and the Pulser is connected to COM2 COM ports 1 through 8 can be selected Once you have selected the correct port click on Initialize Port which will cause the software to search for the pulser If it can t find the pulser on the specified port such as would occur if the pulser were not turned on or if it were connected to a different port you will get an error message If this happens check the cable connections check that the pulser is powered or try a different Comm port Click on the Triggers tab Figure 125 Select the Trig
208. on of uniform density is zero Boundary features are enhanced by varying degrees Sobel Edge Detection The Sobel edge detection method is more involved but produces greatly enhanced features Number the squares of the subregion of the image as follows Ag Ai Ao A7 A3 Ag As Ag The replacement for the center cell called R is R X2 Y2 where X Ay 2A3 Ag Ao 2A7 A6 Y Ag 2A Ag Ag 2A5 A4 Figure 103 illustrates the effect of edge detection on an image k Figure 103 Original Image left and Edge detected Image right Edge Enhancement Procedure Use the following procedure to perform Edge Enhancement on an image 1 Select Edge Enhancement from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed Pratt William K Digital Image Processing John Wiley amp Sons New York 1978 pp 487 488 114 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best
209. on the Figure 36 Typical Data Acquisition Image Acquisition menu or click on the Stop button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be displayed You can now use the Save function on the File Menu to save the data to a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page For a PI MAX system switch the Camera State back to Safe mode on the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page This completes the initial data acquisition routine which should work with any Princeton Instruments Controller Chapter 4 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files Introduction This chapter discusses how to open close and save existing data files to disk Options for saving and deleting files will be explained Data files created with temporary file names should be saved to disk periodically Files should be closed completely to conserve RAM for data collection Data files can be deleted directly from WinView 32 without using the File Manager or any other file utility Note WinView 32 can read data files acquired with earlier versions of WinView Versions of WinView prior to 1 6 cannot read WinView 32 data files Neither can versions prior to 1 6 read data files that were collected with earlier versions and then opened modified and saved using WinView 32 This should be considered carefully before modifying and saving old data files with WinView 32 Opening Data Files In WinView 32 files are ope
210. one To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernal parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing Sharpening Functions Parameters tab page Sharpening Sharpening is also accomplished by mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Sharpening Parameters tab page These masks sometimes called high pass filters enhance regions of high contrast while not affecting regions of low contrast Sharpening Procedure Use the following procedure to sharpen an image 1 2 Input Parameters Output Operation User defined Select Sharpening from the Process menu Enter the Input Image and Output Image names oa tee On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is D A 0 q 5 5 0 1 0 to be performed If you want to process only part of the Input ey amb Ce Ha Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw Figure 104 Sharpening Parameters tab an ROI in the active window and click the page Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best one To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernel parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 11
211. ons are perhaps the most fundamental and important of all hardware selection decisions and directly influence the appearance of many other WinView 32 screens and the selections provided on them As a result setting up the software for use in any system should always begin with the Controller selection Hardware Setup XXX Hardware Setup XXX x Controller CCD Display Interface Cleans Skips Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips T Use PVCAM Controller Number E Controller Type Controller Version z Camera Type Controller Type Controller Version zl x l Camera Type Shutter Type Readout Mode LOGIC OUT Output HRS E a Shutter Type j an E E p Readout Mode LOGIC OUT Output a x 7 conisenectenl Time Vertical Shift Time us xxxxx Shutter Comp Time Pre z ri msec Vertical Shift a m Vertical Shift Time us xxxxx Shutter Comp Time Post A RS170 Type Window Size a a I Vertical Shift i NISC r i peers a i J MPP From Controller RS170 Type Window Size E SS NTSC x I Anti Blooming T Custom Chip T Custom Timing NRR Load Default i oad Defaults Meie che From Controller Launch Camera Detection Wizard I Show Custom Timing I AntiBlooming Cancel Help Cancel Help Figure 21 Controller Camera tab page left 2 5 19 0 and earlier right 2 5 19 6 and later Figure 21 shows all of the fields and check boxes that exist on the Controller Detector tab
212. options cleans amp skips and user defined chip parameters No single controller provides all possible selections and only the ones applicable to the selected controller are listed on the Hardware Setup dialog box tab pages 5 Detector Camera CCD Selection Note The Detector Detector Camera CCD X Camera CCD for a PVCAM supported camera Select the type of detector or camera that your controller is running is automatically determined from the camera entry in the PVCAM LINI file The Detector Camera CCD dialog is displayed Cee Hep after you select the controller type Only the Figure 20 Detector Camera CCD Setup dialog box detector camera or CCD types associated with the selected controller will be available for selection If your system has NVRAM the correct selection will be automatically made Otherwise you will need to choose from the list After you click on Finish the Hardware Setup dialog box will be displayed so you can begin entering other hardware information 36 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Entering Controller and Detector Characteristics The Controller Detector tab page may also be named Controller Camera or Controller CCD depending on the hardware selections is used to enter and update Controller Type Detector Camera or CCD depending on the system Type and some of the Controller Detector type parameters such as Shutter Type and Readout Mode The Controller and Detector Type selecti
213. or as a 3 D Graph multiple strips from the same graph or the same strip from multiple frames You can choose to allow the software control how the data will be displayed or make the selection yourself To have WinView 32 control the data display mode simply check the Auto Select box provided in the File Open dialog box and also in the Display Layout dialog box The Auto Select algorithm makes the selection depending on the number of data strips as described on page 61 Chapter 5 Displaying the Data 63 Displaying circuit spe The image used in this exercise is circuit spe one of the images supplied with your WinView 32 software Once you become comfortable working with this image you should have little difficulty in working with images from actual measurement data 1 From the File menu select Open The Open dialog box Figure 46 will appear allowing you to select the image to be opened The Look In field provides a browser function so you can easily find the directory where the images By default the data directory will be Sam Creuit spe a subdirectory of the Files of type winx Data spe al directory where Saline WinView 32 was JE pa atic installed Subdirectory s pag er n e Display Layout a names and the filenames or a n et EASE of all files of the specified type the WinView 32 Figure 46 Open dialog box data type is spe in the current directory are listed in the box below the directory name
214. oseconds By sweeping both the delay and the width and making provision for entering time constant and amplitude information for two species the sequential exponential algorithm is ideally suited to making this type of measurement At the start of the decay where the amplitude is high but the decay is rapid the gate pulses are narrow and close together Towards the end of the decay where the decay is slow the gate pulses are Chapter 14 Pulser Operation 145 further apart but much wider to accommodate the lower signal amplitude The result is output data that is relatively constant in intensity over the decay time This data can be easily normalized by dividing each point by the exposure time and then using a spline fit to recover the curve The logarithm base e can then be taken to obtain a straight line or two lines successive line segments each with a different slope for two species Tangents can be fitted to each segment to determine the rate constant for each species Fast Decay Time Constant In a two species system enter the decay time of the faster of the two species Note that it is not essential that you enter a value If you have the decay time information you will get better data if the information is entered but acceptable results can be obtained in many situations by using the default If there is only one species or if you want to discard the fast decay process simply enter zero for the Amplitude Note that the Gate
215. ost processing PALAMELETS eeir niei e n E ENEEK 114 PLOCCMUTC ct 2 Ss Beh RS een E ee 114 SHUTTER signal 0 0 0 cccccceeseceeeeeeeseceeeeeeseeeeeeaes 39 Shutter types cubs scsi cited as aa 37 Smoothing post processing parameter Semere ei giii 115 proced ra isn esin iarrar ataa 115 Sobel edge detection ccceccessesseeseeeeeeeteeeeees 113 Software Accumulations s eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerereees 146 Splash strecinte a n n i e 25 Square Root math operation sss sessseseeseeseeees seese 107 Squared math operation cccccecseeseereeeeeseeeees 107 Status Bar MeSSAGes eeeeesseceeeeceseceeeeecseeeeneeeees 15 Strip selection Shift End key combination ceccessseeseeereee 76 Shift Home key combination ceeeseeeeeeees 76 via Custom Toolbar 76 Subtraction math operation c ceseseeseeeeetees 107 T V Technical support 0 0 0 cccceeseeesceeeceseceteceeeseeeneeenes 206 Temperature how done with each controller type 05 46 Temperature Control 0 ceeeeeseeeteeseeeneeeeeeeeeenseees 46 Threshold and Clipping post processing 124 Thresholding on line process ccsseesseesteereees 85 TIFE files oss ccdecscshdons isles ainean aaa 132 Time Constant esene irere e e Sites 145 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup 147 AKTA BET S A EE S 15 Uninstalling WinView 32 cccecceeseeeneeteeeeneesees 186 Upgrade Device Driver wWiza
216. otes ROI Definition amp Binning 99 1 Right clicking inside an ROI opens the ROI Context menu which in addition to providing auto scale and zoom functions enables the labeling of image and graphical data 2 The Experiment Setup Save Load tab page allows all experiment set parameters including ROL to be saved in a user designated file for later recall See the discussion of the Save Load tab page in the online Help oe ROIs by Keyboard entry Open the Experiment Setup dialog and click GREIEIRES on the ROI Setup tab to open the ROI Setup ADC tab page Figure 95 Main Data File ROI Setup E Data Corrections TIP Acquire a full chip image before adding New Pattern r 4 Number Stored 0 or editing ROI patterns The existing patterns will be superimposed on the image 2 Note the Number Stored value This will tell you if how many ROIs have already been End 384 End 578 stored Depending on what you want to do you may want click on Clear or Clear All to remove stored ROI patterns M Ful Clear ClearAll STORE To add a new pattern click on the spin buttons gai pra es cos pissa next to the Number Stored text until the text osred lT u 7 oath to the far left is New Pattern This will not be Fiiil necessary if there are no patterns stored a Timing Processes Save Load x Start fi 4 Y Start fi 4 ps a Group 1 4 Group fi 4 Enter the X axis Start End and Group Ac
217. other ROI sized frame is read out The net result is a series of images separated by spacer regions streaming up the CCD under the mask ice C Normal Mode Enabled Shift Register Virtual Chip Definition Chip Y Dimension 337 Chip Dimension 10 af Region Of Interest Frame Transfer Mask yaa f en f Bnd 10 4 vend fi x Groug fT Er Y Group fi E MMS nd E UGUA lt SSV ometen KSSS AAA AA Nirtual Chip Mask 1777777 Shutter OWI _ a LLL RIAA SSSA IS SIS TS LSS SA TSA SA FA Chee UA a AA a a a a E A S O E A S A O S A A S A A D Figure 152 Virtual Chip Functional Figure 153 Virtual Chip dialog box diagram Chapter 16 Software Options 157 Virtual Chip Setup The following procedure covers the basic hardware and software setup for Virtual Chip operation Equipment Suitable Princeton Instruments camera with 512x512FT or other frame transfer CCD array Suitable ST 133 with TAXI interface card High Speed Serial TAXI cable Suitable Host Computer with installed Princeton Instruments RSPI High Speed PCI Card Software WinView 32 version 2 4 or higher WXvchip opt installed in the same directory as the executable WinView 32 program Assumptions You are familiar with the WinView 32 software and have read the hardware manuals Masking is for a 47x47 pixel Virtual Chip with its origin at 1 1 Procedure 1 Verify that the pow
218. ownload To DG535 Help dialog box 4 Select DG535 Then click on Figure 136 DG535 dialog box the Setup DG535 button The DG535 dialog box will open Chapter 14 10 11 Pulser Operation 141 Click on the Comm Port tab Figure 137 Triggers Gating Comm Port For the Port Type select GPIB Then set the Port Address to the GPIB address Pot Type GPIB gt of the DG535 Default setting is 15 Port Address fis Once you have selected the correct port address click on Initialize Port If the software cannot find the pulser on this port such as if the pulser is not turned on or if the address setting incorrect you will get an error message If this happens check the address check the cable _ carcel _Download Te D535 He connections and check that the pulser is powered Click on the Triggers tab Figure 138 Triggers Gating Comm Port Figure 137 DG535 Comm Port tab page Select the Trigger mode Input Trigger Mode either Internal in which the DG535 free runs or Intemal jare rood E Hz External in which it is triggered from an external e SS J Hreshala Vall source Slope ieronagan If operating in the Internal z EE f Falah trigger mode set the Trigger EEA E ee E Spohn Frequency in Hz Consult the DG535 Manual to determine the maximum Trigger Frequency that can be used in your application If operati
219. ox enter the complete file name or search fugue n eas o and Clipping for a file using the browser accessed by ATAMEIENS a the button to the right of the field 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 On the Parameters tab page if a clipping operation is to be performed select the clipping option as described above For a threshold operation set the threshold level to the desired value 6 Enter the name of the Output Image on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 7 Click on Apply to begin processing Additional Post Acquisition Processes 125 Cross Section Introduction Selecting Cross Section on the Process menu opens the Cross Section window which allows you to separately display and store horizontal and vertical cross 25 Y 1 2 1 e 497518 sections of an image Figure 116 shows two X axis cross sections based on the same ROI The upper data is averaged the lower data is summed x 25 k 19860 Y 1 Zz l 4709 Procedure Cross Section 1 Select Cross Section from the Process jain Per cut menu
220. ox appears on the C page only If checked the output image will be displayed as soon as the processing is complete Operations On the Operation tab page the math operations are listed as either Linear or Non Linear The operand s for math operations can be a single file a file and a constant or two files In addition to allowing you to perform these operations on entire files WinView also allows you to specify the frames if multi frame and a region of interest ROI e When working with a single file the specified operation is performed on each pixel value of A and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations available are grouped under the Non Linear heading Log10 Absolute Value Natural Log Bitwise Complement Square Root Binary NOT Squared e When working with a single file and a constant the operation will be performed on each pixel value of A using the constant specified on the B tab page and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations available are grouped under the Linear heading Addition Min Subtraction Max Multiplication Bitwise AND Division Bitwise OR Bitwise Exclusive OR e When working with two files corresponding pixels from the two files A and B are operated on and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations that can be performed are the same as for a Single file and Constant descri
221. paaschuns ETES 67 Label Display acti i monori a a A aT A a 67 Label Options subdialog DOX cccccsscessecsseceeceeceseceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeenaes 68 Label Text Entry DOK menie e EE E EE E ER EE 68 Data with Finished Label ceecceseeseeeeceseeeeeecesecaeeeeeeaecaceeaeeseceaeeaeeeeenaeeas 68 Edit box with Line wrapped Label and Finished Label 0 0 e ce eeeeeeeeeeee 69 ROI resized to correct Line wWrapping cccccccceseeeteceteeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeneeesaes 69 Display after changing Font Selection 0 ccccsccesssesseeeeceeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaaes 70 3D Graph with Five Data Strips cccccccesccessceeeceeeeeeeceseeeseeeseecsaeenaeenseenaeens 70 Openidialog BOX nennen e a shaves id toa A a A a SE 71 Display Layout dialog DOX 0 0 ccceccsecssecsseceseceseceseceseceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeenaes 71 Hid lamp spe 3 D Graph cccecccecsseeseesecseesecssecesecesecsaeeneeeseeeeseeeseeesaeenaees 72 Hid lamp spe 3D Graph with Region selected for Viewing ccceeeee 73 viii Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102
222. page WinView 32 will display and hide features based on the controller camera and readout mode selected All of the features are described in the text that follows Use PVCAM Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier This box will only appear if you have an installed Tucson PCI interface card have a PhotonMAX or have an installed USB 2 0 interface for a Princeton Instruments detector or the Acton Research InSpectrum This box is automatically checked when you indicate during installation that you are using a PVCAM supported camera Note When you change the check status of this box a warning message Changing This Value Will Cause All Current Controllers To Be Destroyed Do You Want To Continue appears This message means that the current Hardware settings will be deleted and the Hardware Wizard will be displayed so you can characterize the new controller and camera Controller Number Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier This field will only appear if you have more than one Princeton Instruments brand PCI interface card installed If you have a controller connected to each PCI card you would select the number of the controller that you want to use Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 37 Controller Type The currently selected Controller Type is displayed in this field If you change the controller that is being used in the system choose the correct controller name from the selection list displayed by clicking on the button at the end of the field Ap
223. pe Small lt 25 mm Large 35mm None Pulser Type DG535 PG200 or PTG PTG is usually associated with the PI MAX camera Pulser Serial Number Refer to serial label typically located on the back of the unit and in the lower left corner Installing WinView 32 Caution Because WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 contain files with the same name but different content do not install WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 software in the same directory Before installing WinView 32 Verify that your computer meets the requirements listed on pages 17 18 Check to see if the interface card has been installed Note that the interface card is not necessary if the computer will only be used for post processing data If you plan to collect data and the card is not installed in your computer you will need to install it and add the hardware after Win View 32 is installed If installing under Windows NT 2000 or XP make sure that you are logged on as administrator of the Workstation Otherwise the installation will fail because changes cannot be made to the Windows Registry Check to see if WinSpec 32 has been installed on your system If it has note the directory name so you won t accidentally install WinView 32 in the same directory Determine how you will be installing the software WinView 32 is provided on a CD shipped with the system or it can be installed from the Princeton Instruments FTP site During the installation
224. pen for PTG Toe Internal Sync PI MAX with PTG T Rae peel 3 only selected Edge Trigger edge gt Pre Open Not checked For PI MAX system checked for DG535 or PTG Aoauite Focus Torce Hein Safe Mode selected Figure 28 Timing tab page External Trigger not checked Edge Trigger edge Delay time 0 Use Interrupts not checked Chapter 3 Initial Data Collection 49 4 On the Data Corrections tab page Figure 29 Eisin Ea all of the correction functions should be OFF AOC aji timan res a Mairi DataFile AO Setup Data Conections r Arithmetic 1 D Data TL Flatfield F Aae TIF Hj maaa ESR oE CCD Blemishes Cosmic Ray Removal Remove OFF C Temporal lenny Filel Snie C Spatial fw ETERU AY Accuite Focus Cancel Help Figure 29 Data Corrections tab page 5 On the ADC tab page Figure 30 set the parameters as they apply to your particular system Parameters that might be listed Main Data Fie ROI Setup Data Conections ADC Timing Processes Save Load follow Rate ADC rate Only those rates available Fate iookHe for you re a D converter will be displayed making it necessary to Type stow designate the A D type first Select the Contioler Gein on Gana E maximum speed allowed by the e ina eid converter If the camera is a PI MAX Resolution 15eits with a Thomson 512 CCD select FAST ST 130 owners
225. pendix A provides a cross reference table for systems controllers and CCD arrays Note After you have selected the Controller Type you can load the default settings for your controller camera and CCD array by clicking on Load Defaults From Controller if this button is present Controller Version In the case of the ST 133 and PentaMAX controllers different versions have been released having different capabilities The available software selections will correctly reflect these differences when the proper version number is specified in this box Camera Type The selected Camera Detector CCD Type is displayed in this field Clicking on the button at the end of the box drops the selection list so that the selected type can be changed if necessary Note that the listed camera types depend on the controller selection requiring that the controller type be specified first Shutter Type There are six selections None Ifthe camera has no shutter frame transfer or interline CCD array and is not an Intensified camera select None Small A small shutter is one that is typically 25 mm or smaller in diameter This setting represents a shutter compensation time of approximately 8 msec Large A large shutter is one that is typically 35 mm and larger In the case of a camera having a very large CCD such as the Kodak 2k x 2k a large shutter may have been installed This setting represents a shutter compensation time of approximately 28 msec
226. plete control over all warranties and may alter or terminate any or all warranties at any time we deem necessary Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants this product against substantial defects in materials and or workmanship for a period of up to one 1 year after shipment During this period Princeton Instruments will repair the product or at its sole option repair or replace any defective part without charge to you You must deliver the entire product to the Princeton Instruments factory or at our option to a factory authorized service center You are responsible for the shipping costs to return the product International customers should contact their local Princeton Instruments authorized representative distributor for repair information and assistance or visit our technical support page at www piacton com Limited One 1 Year Warranty on Refurbished or Discontinued Products Princeton Instruments warrants with the exception of the CCD imaging device which carries NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED this product against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to one 1 year after shipment During this period Princeton Instruments will repair or replace at its sole option any defective parts without charge to you You must deliver the entire product to the Princeton Instruments factory or at our option a factory authorized service center You are responsible for the shipping costs to re
227. plication and do a Custom installation of it with the appropriate interface component selected PCI Interface or ISA Interface depending on the interface card type Be sure to deselect the interface component that does not apply to your system Note WinX versions 2 6 0 and higher does not support the ISA interface Data Loss or Serial Violation You may experience either or both of these conditions if the host computer has been set up with Power Saving features enabled This is particularly true for power saving with regard to the hard drive Make sure that Power Saving features are disabled while you are running WinView 32 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict message Data Overrun Due To Hardware Conflict Figure 159 Data Overrun Due to Hardware Conflict dialog box If this dialog box appears when you try to acquire a test image acquire data or run in focus mode check the CCD array size and then check the DMA buffer size A large array for example a 2048x2048 array requires a larger DMA buffer larger setting than that for a smaller array for example a 512x512 array Appendix F Troubleshooting 191 To change the DMA buffer setting 1 Note the array size on the Setup Hardware Controller CCD tab page or the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page Full Chip dimensions 2 Open Setup Environment Environment dialog box 3 Increase the DMA buffer size to a minimum of 32 Mb 64 Mb if it is currently 32 Mb or
228. puter interface card and the application software in this case WinView 32 Note that other components such as a computer coolant circulator and pulser can also be ordered ST 133 Controller K Use y lt 4 P The interface card f karai installed in the host Camera _ computer permits ag communication between the ED Interface Cabis host computer and the controller often an eae ST 133 A The controller accepts Detecior Convoter Manuals and AGRON Card input from the host computer and WinView 32 and converts it to the appropriate control signals for the camera These signals allow you to specify the readout rate binning parameters regions of interest gain and array temperature After data is acquired in the camera it is transmitted to the controller where it is processed transmitted to the host computer displayed in the WinView 32 window and can be stored to disk Figure 6 illustrates possible system configurations pulsers are not shown Figure 7 shows the interconnections for an air cooled Princeton Instruments camera with an 27 28 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 internal controller Figure 8 and Figure 9 show the interconnections for a Princeton Instruments system with an external controller as well as interconnections to an optional coolant circulator and an optional shutter WinView 32 DLLs Snap lns Macros PVCAM Interface Card Controller
229. quire Focus Cancel Help values The Group value controls the X axis binning 1 indicates no binning Figure 95 ROI Setup tab page higher values indicate the number of pixels being binned to increase the sensitivity at the expense of resolution Multiple ROIs can have different X axis values TIP If you re not sure of the chip size open the Main tab page and note the X and Y values there Enter the Y axis Start End and Group values The Start and End values indicate the height of the image and where the image is located along the Y axis Group determines the Y axis binning Click on Store to store the newly created ROI The Number Stored will be updated Repeat this process until you have finished adding ROIs 4 To edit an existing pattern click on the spin buttons until the pattern number is displayed in the Edit Pattern field 5 Then make your changes 6 Click on Store to store the changed ROI pattern Note To scan the full CCD chip at any time simply select the Use Full Chip radio button on the Main tab page and begin acquisition 100 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Defining ROIs by Mouse input Often you can easily identify a region of interest by visually inspecting the full chip image When this can be done it is very easy to define the ROI graphically as follows 1 First click on the Use Full Chip radio button Experimental Setup Main tab page so that a full chip image will be acquired Then click
230. range 8 Click on Apply to begin processing Binning and Skipping Introduction Binning and Skipping x Selecting Binning on the Process menu opens P t the Binning and Skipping window which pub gana Output allows binning to be accomplished in software Binning after the data has been collected The Parameters tab page allows the bin size to be Dimension fi set independently in the X and Y directions z The Skipping parameter allows you to define Y Dimension al the interval between binned regions The C Average Skipping parameter size can be independently a set for X and Y There is also provision for Skipping 7 either averaging or summing the binned data 7 points If Average is selected each output data Dimension zl value will be the average of the binned data values in each region If Average is unselected Y Dimension f 3 each output data value will be the sum of the binned data values The procedure follows Procedure Mouse Apply Clase Help 1 Select Binning and Skipping from the Process menu Figure 118 Postprocessing Binning and 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input Skipping Parameters tab page image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the button to the right of the field g 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performe
231. rd ccecceseeseee 197 USB 2 0 data OVEN saoe eeo a nea 191 InstallatiOn EAA E E E E 23 troubleshooting ssseseseeeseeesssrserssesersrrseeeessesees 189 Vertical skipssi18 id cies ane a Ri 44 92 View Width Delay Sequence ccceseeseeseeres 146 Vartual CHiPs teri tended ad a a aa reae 156 W Z Warnings intensified cameras seseesseeeesseeeeseeseesresreresserees 45 susceptibility of intensified cameras to light overload dami e e rre aa aa a Ean aE 45 Warranties image intensifier detector cece eeeseeeeeeeee 204 normal wear item disclaimer cceeee 203 OTE CATs s 5 sie doccsiecacscs tussnceosctesies esenbenstestscetuses 203 one year on refurbished discontinued products 203 owner s manual and troubleshooting 205 sealed Chamber iii Sonate tees A 204 SOLWATE 2 secs ehofsteass aar a ea ARa 204 VACUUM INTCSTILY ee eeecesecececseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeess 204 XP vacuum chamber ccceseeseeeeseeteeetees 203 xray detector ce ceeccescesecsecseeeseeeseeseeeseeeeeeees 204 your responsibility ee ee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneees 205 Websteria enei inira nak 206 WinView 32 amp WinView 16 in same computer 185 Wizard Camera Detection ccccscccsceeseesseeseeeseseeeeteensees 29 Hardware Setup ccesccssecseesseeseeeseeeeesseeeeeeneees 33 Upgrade Device Driver ceceeseeseeeeeteeetees 197 Z AXIS endpoint 00 eee cece ceseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees
232. rint Preview buttons Close onnaa eee ae ett ee at 131 Nex PAGE oes aean ana ENA A aE EPRA sed 131 Prev Page nonnario ieor esn 131 Pit nsore e ET 131 TWO Palenie a E e a A 131 LOOM Ni PEPEE EE TETEE 131 LOOM Out ani agn an E a E 131 Version 2 5 I Print Setup dialog DOX sssssesesseeeesseserserseeressrseesse 129 Printing from WinView 32 sseseeeererre 129 COlOr mapping oreen tene e s 130 saving as TIF file before printing 132 SCTEENACAP CULE ee scents ccdes Jeevs ain ERER Ainaa 131 Process Mask operations cesceeseeeseeeteeseeenes 111 references 56 hh lie te E 121 PTG active MOMS eiin a aea 138 continuous exponential mode 139 continuous linear mode s es 139 Interactive Trigger Setup ccceseeseeeereee 147 Operation Of eeceeceseceseceecseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeens 137 repetitive gating SCtUP eee eeeeseeeeeteeteeetees 138 Sequential gating setup 0 00 ceeceseesteeteeseereeeees 138 slope threshold termination amp gate delay from Sati sett E E TEE EE cas 8 hth 137 trigger Mode cies ccd cies ceaeinsciesseteteien cece 137 Pulser operatios er e Oe 133 PVCAMLINI o 23 24 189 192 193 196 R S RE a EENE E E T 185 Registry file rcsgnicnreminsennraniiiinrernnii 183 Reinstallation of Win View 32 seess 186 ROI defining a single reQion eee eeeeseeseeeeeeteeeees 99 graphical input MOUSC ccceeeeseeteeeeeeeees 100 IMage DINNING ee eeeeeseeseeeeeeeceeeee
233. rlier versions of the WinView software Version 2 5 19 6 of the WinView introduced enhancements to the former Hardware Setup Wizard Now called the Camera Detection Wizard this function is used to load the WinView hardware setup parameter fields with default values for a WinView compatible camera system The Camera Detection Wizard runs automatically the first time you install WinView and can be launched at a later date if you decide to control a different WinView compatible camera The autodetection function can be used for both PVCAM based camera systems USB 1 interface USB 2 interface Photometrics PCI PhotonMAX and Princeton Instruments PCI TAXT interface based systems To Use the Autodetection Function 1 Make sure the camera system is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on 2 Run WinView The Camera Detection Wizard will automatically run if this is the first time you have installed a Princeton Instruments WinX application WinView 32 WinSpec 32 or WinXTest 32 and a supported camera Otherwise if 30 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 you installing a new camera type click on the Launch Camera Detection Wizard button on the Controller CCD tab page to start the wizard 3 On the Welcome dialog Figure 10 leave the checkbox unselected and click on Next Camera Detection Wizard Welcome Figure 10 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome dialog box 4 Select the system that you want to ins
234. roceed in similar fashion to select each file to be opened Once all files to be opened have been selected click on Open or double click on a selected file and all of the selected files will be opened There are a number of additional options and operations that can be performed from the Open dialog box For example clicking the Display Layout button will directly open the Display Layout dialog box described in Chapter 5 In addition options for the organization of the Open dialog box itself can be selected by means of the icons to the right of the Look In field or by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the file listing area of the box but not on a file name Right clicking on a file name opens a Windows shortcut menu that provides a number of additional operations including open delete rename print properties and edit operations such as copy and cut 58 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Saving Data Files Data files must be saved to disk before exiting the software It is also recommended that you save periodically when making measurements to minimize the overall risk of data loss If you exit and there are unsaved data files you will be prompted to save them The File menu provides three Save commands as follows 1 Save Saves the active data file using the original file name and type and in the original directory folder 2 Save As The Save As dialog box is used to save the active data file to a user specified file n
235. rogrammed each exposure is repeated n times where n is the number of accumulations specified Every accumulation is processed before the gate delay and width change for the next shot 144 ATTENTION ATTENTION WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 The total number of exposures equals the specified Number of Images times the number of Accumulations Accumulations can be set on the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box and on the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two settings must be the same for proper operation Gate Width The starting and ending gate widths are independently set The first Shot will have the Starting gate width and the last Shot will have the Ending gate width This is true for both the Fixed and Exponential increment type Gate Delay The starting and ending gate delay values are independently set The first Shot will be taken at the Starting delay with respect to Ty and the last Shot will occur at the Ending delay with respect to To This is true for both the Fixed and Exponential increment type The precise timing of both the gate and signal at the camera will additionally depend on a number of different delay mechanisms that can significantly affect the experiment These are discussed for the PI MAX camera in some detail in Tips and Tricks section of the PI MAX system manual Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed If this box is checked and you specify a gate width or delay outside the allo
236. rred Check interface cable Serial violations have occurred Check interface cable Figure 170 Serial Violations Have Occurred dialog box This error message dialog will appear if you try to acquire an image or focus the camera and either or both of the following conditions exists e The camera system is not turned ON e There is no communication between the camera and the host computer To correct the problem 1 Turn OFF the camera system if it is not already OFF 2 Make sure the Detector Controller cable is secured at both ends and that the computer interface cable is secured at both ends 3 After making sure that the cables are connected turn the camera system power ON 4 Click OK on the error message dialog and retry acquiring an image or running in focus mode Note This error message will also be displayed if you turn the camera system OFF or a cable comes loose while the application software is running in Focus mode 200 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This page intentionally left blank Appendix G Glossary A D converter Analog to digital converter In a CCD camera system the electronic circuitry that converts the analog information continuous amplitudes acquired by the camera into the digital data quantified discrete steps used for image display ADU Analog to digital unit A number representing a CCD s output The relationship between the ADUs generated and the number of electrons acquired on t
237. rs for example liquid nitrogen cooled vs thermoelectrically cooled ST 133 2 MHz ST 133 controller characterized by six software selectable ADC rates ST 133 5 MHz ST 133 controller characterized by duplex head cable ST 138 Older controller for TE LN ICCD and ITE units It offers a few special features such as hardware accumulator In general this controller is being phased out Cameras Detectors HCTE CCD See NTE CCD and NTE 2 ICCD Standard classic intensified camera requires purging has internal high voltage power but requires external high voltage pulses for gating Controlled by ST 133 or ST 138 LN CCD Liquid nitrogen cooled detector 1 5 liter Dewar is standard can be run with ST 138 or ST 133 LN InGaAs Indium gallium arsenide detector controlled by a ST 133 controller MTE 2 Miniature liquid cooled camera designed for in vacuum chamber operation can be run with ST 133 controller Included in a PI MTE system NTE CCD and NTE 2 Stands for new TE head More cube shaped than the TE designed for maximum cooling NTE 2 requires high power version of ST 133 RTE CCD Round thermoelectrically cooled camera can be run with ST 133 controllers TE CCD Water cooled camera can be run with ST 138 or some ST 133 controllers TEA CCD Forced air cooled camera can be run with ST 138 or some ST 133 controllers V ICCD Video intensified detector Always shipped with its own control box produces standard v
238. rs that may occur when computer controller communication uses the USB 2 0 protocol Camera or similar name on Hardware Setup dialog box Controller CCD Display Interface Controller Type Cameral 7 Figure 158 Cameral in Controller Type Filed When a PVCAM based camera is detected selected during the Camera Detection Wizard formerly the Hardware Wizard a default name such as Cameral will be shown in the Detected Hardware table and will be entered in the Controller Type on the Setup Hardware Controller CCD tab page Because this name is not particularly descriptive you may want to change it Such a change is made by editing the PVCAM LINI file that is generated by Camera Detection Wizard or by the RSConfig exe if you have a software version 2 5 19 0 or earlier To change the default Controller Type name l Using Notepad or a similar text editor open PVCAM INI which is located in the Windows directory C WINNT for example You should see entries like the ones below Camera 1 Type 1 Name Cameral Driver apausb sys Port 0 ID 523459 Change the Name entry to something more meaningful for you for example ST133USB to indicate that this is a PVCAM based system using an ST 133 with a USB 2 0 interface and save the edited file Camera 1 Type 1 Name ST133USB Driver apausb sys Port 0 ID 523459 3 The new Controller Type name will now appear in the Controller Type field 189 190 WinView 32 Ma
239. rticular system Pulser configuration is discussed in Chapter 14 13 14 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Initial Data Collection provides a procedure for initial data collection allowing users to gain some operating familiarity before going on to more complex measurements Opening Closing and Saving Data Files describes how to open close and save data files in WinView 32 Displaying the Data describes the data file display options Part 2 Advanced Topics Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 On Line Data Acquisition Processes describes data acquisition processes that can be activated to occur during data acquisition These processes are on line thresholding and ASCII output Cleaning describes the cleaning features that are used while data acquisition is idle to prevent the buildup of unwanted charge on the array ROI Definition amp Binning describes how to set a region of interest ROI so that data is only collected from the specified portion of the CCD array It also describes binning the summing together of charge from several pixels on the array or in software during data acquisition Simple or more advanced binning options can be configured easily with WinView 32 Correction Techniques explains correction options such as background subtraction flatfield correction and co
240. ruction This feature is supported by Version 5 and higher ST 133 controllers and will only appear if the detector camera also supports this feature Continuous cleans instruction does horizontal shifts while doing vertical shifts for a faster continuous clean Check this box if you want to apply the continuous cleans instruction to the continuous cleans function available when External Sync timing mode Experiment Setup Timing tab page is being used to acquire data With this instruction the delay between an External Sync trigger and the start of exposure is minimized Refer to Chapter 7 Cleaning for more information about continuous cleans and continuous cleans instruction Note Older versions of the ST 133 controllers as well as other controller types and cameras do not support this instruction WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Vertical Skips Vertical skips are associated with regions of interest ROIs that are smaller than the full chip This feature allows you to bin and quickly traverse the rows that precede and follow the ROI The rows to be processed and discarded are binned into blocks each containing a number of rows with the Number of Blocks parameter determining how many blocks there will be before and after the ROI Shift Register lt H SKIPS binned vertically Figure 25
241. s and Groups of 1 e Region of Interest The settings below assume a 47x47 pixel ROI i e the entire virtual chip An ROI that is a subset of the virtual chip can be defined X Start 1 Y Start 1 X End 47 Y End 47 X Group Y Group e Click on the Download Virtual Chip Definition button This will download the definition set up the ROI and calculate the readout time Chapter 16 Software Options 159 Observe the calculated readout time If you need a shorter period change the settings for example enter a smaller Y dimension or use binning in the Y direction and click on the Download Virtual Chip Definition button again Click on Close 12 From the Setup menu select Environment Note When setting up for focusing the number of Frames Interrupt should be left at 1 DMA Buffer Mb By default the buffer size is 8 Mb Using the following formula calculate the amount of DMA memory required X x Y x Frames x 2 bytes pixel For example the buffer size required for a 47x47 virtual array acquiring 1000 frames would be 47 x 47 x 1000 frames x 2 bytes pixel 4 4 Mb If the calculated value is greater than 8 Mb enter the appropriate size Note This value is not enabled until you restart your computer Frames Interrupt If the number of frames is greater than 256 the preprogrammed slot limit for a PCI card increase the number of Frames Interrupt value Use the formula Frames 256 and round the result to
242. s but less than eleven the data will be plotted as a 3D Graph as shown in Figure 44 page 61 If there are only two strips of data they will be displayed as graphs stacked in a two dimensional plot the same as for a 3D Graph of two strips See Figure 45 page 62 gt A single strip will always be plotted as a simple X vs Y plot Note that from two to ten strips the intensity Y axis scale shifts position as required to read true for the selected strip e If Image is selected all data points will be plotted as a function of the strip and pixel number e If3D Graph is selected multiple data strips will be plotted as a function of intensity versus pixel number the actual number of data strips plotted depending on the 3D Layout display parameter settings All of the strips could come from the same frame or in the case of a file containing multiple frames the same numbered strip could come from each frame e If Graph is selected the selected data strip only will be plotted as a function of intensity versus pixel number 4 Note the Files of Type field which allows you to select files for listing according to their type If WinXData spe is selected only files of type spe will be listed This is the native WinView 32 format If TIFF or 8 bit TIFF File tif is selected only files of the type tif will be listed If All Files is selected all files in the folder will be listed WinView 32 can open either spe file
243. s information required to identify the interface camera is referenced by the Hardware Wizard when you are setting up WinView 32 with USB for the first time If the Wizard did not find a PVCAM INI file or if RSConfig exe was run but the USB 2 0 camera is Camera_2 in the PVCAM INI file Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer will be selectable from the Wizard s Interface dialog box Interface x Select the type of interface your system has Demo 7 Demo High Speed PCI PCI T imer me e Figure 163 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog box At this point you will need to run the RSConfig exe program 1 Ifyou have not already done so close WinView 32 2 Make sure the ST 133 is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on 3 Run RSConfig from the Windows Start Programs PI Acton menu or from the directory where you installed WinView 4 When the RSConfig dialog box Figure 164 appears you can change the camera name to one that is more specific or you can keep the default name Camera2 When you have finished click on the Done button You will next edit the generated PVCAM INI file WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 m Names Style Camera 1 Camerat Princeton Style Camera2 OO Princeton Style USB2 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 164 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles 5 Using Notepad or a similar text e
244. s or tif files 8 bit or 16 bit Select type 8 bit TIFF File to open an 8 bit TIFF file Select type TIFF File to open a 16 bit TIFF file The open display default selection can be changed and saved from the Display Layout window Chapter 4 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 57 5 Either double click on RGURMDEETEe TEs oy x the name of the file you want to open or single click on the name and then click on the Open button For example with Image selected double clicking on Circuit spe would open that file producing the display shown in Figure 38 Note that there are many different ways of controlling how the image will be displayed as described in Chapter 5 Figure 38 Circuit spe Displayed Multiple Files It is also possible to open multiple files at the same time by using the Win95 Shift Click and Control Click selection features To select a range of contiguously listed files for opening e Hold the Shift key down and click on the first file in the range The file will be selected e Then hold the Shift key down again and click on the last file in the range That file and all the files between the two designated files will be selected To select multiple files which are not listed contiguously e hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the first file That file will be selected e Then hold down the Ctrl key again and click on the second file That file will also be selected e P
245. s the Acton InSpectrum The choice C Yes of Yes or No determines the sequence of Hardware Wizard dialogs Grea Help No is the default selection Figure 17 PVCAM dialog box With the exception of the PhotonMAX this is the appropriate choice if you have a Princeton Instruments camera that uses the TAXI protocol PCI interface After you click on Next the wizard looks for a compatible Princeton Instruments RSPI PCI card and opens the Interface dialog box Yes is the appropriate choice if you have a PhotonMAX a Photometrics camera or an Acton InSpectrum or if the Princeton Instruments camera communication interface is USB 2 0 After you click on Next the wizard will create the PVCAM controller and will open the Controller Type dialog box Are you using a PYCAM supported camera 3 Interface Selection ee tae ee you have a PVCAM supported camera Select the type of interface your system has If you are using a Princeton High Speed PCI Instruments camera with TAXI protocol and a compatible Princeton E o F Fe Zz 5 Instruments RSPI PCI Brack Cancel Help card is found the choices will be PCI Timer High Figure 18 Interface dialog box Speed PCI and Demo The default will be PCI Timer data transfer mode in which data transfer is controlled by a Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 35 polling timer High Speed PCI is a data transfer mode in which data transfer is interrupt driven
246. saecsaecesecuseesseeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaaes 168 Appendix B Data Structure itis cvcestecstecesesseies teecteivenstansieeaiee inns tensieasiacinennceeete 171 Version 1 43 Header sdisuicsecantcct tastes eh giseave sshetetan colt aa E Tana theorist uaren eet 171 Version t 6Header eaea a eE E E E EE a E 172 Version 2 5 Header 3 23 04 ei isolir nioten ter ane e ARE E a E REE ERA 175 Definition of Array SiZes nnne a a a A a A A a ATAS 179 Custom Data Types Used In the Structure cc cc cecccecssecseeseesecsecesecesecneeseeeeeeeseeeaaes 179 Reading Data icccalesicisg ccs hea a och wai bankas vk E ete teh Recht suchas dap ved edited estes 180 vi WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Appendix C CD ROM Failure Work Around ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 181 Appendix D WinView 32 Repair and Maintenance ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 Install Uninstall WinView 32 Components at a Later Time cceeccesceesseeseeeseeeseenees 183 Installing More than One Version of Win View 32 ccseseecceseeeeeeeeesecaeceeeeeeesecneeenees 185 PIHWDEF INI amp SESSION DAT 1 cceeceecceseeseeescesecseeeeceaecaeeeceeaecaaeeceeeecnaeeaeseseeeaeeatees 185 Uninstalling and Reinstalling cece cecccccsccesseeseeeseceseceseceseceseeseeeseeeeeseseaeeeseeeseeeseeeaaes 186 Appendix E USB 2 0 Limitations cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeoes 187 Appendix F Troubleshooting cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee
247. sceeeeseseeeseeeseeeseeeteeenaes 54 Open dialog VOX cinor as ririan iero an e NEEE RA p E RAR A ii ea 55 Circult spe Displayed nonnii Raith gledene a E E E N 57 Data File Save As dialog bOX cccecccecssecsseesseesceeseeensecesecnsecnaeeseeseeeseeeeeneenaes 58 Save As Data Type Saini enri i sansucedhits clad T EE E ETE 58 Data File tab pagen neanta rE ET a EAE EE AERES 59 Right click File Operations menu ccceccseesseesteeneceseceseceseeeseseseeeeeetseenaes 60 Image Display of 256 Data Strips ccccccssecsseceteceseceteceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeenees 61 3D Image Display of 10 Data Strips c eee cccccceesseeseeeneeeseeesseessecnseeneenaeens 61 3D Graph with Two Data Strips ccccccccesccessceseceeeceeeeseeeseeceecsaecnsecnseenaeens 62 Open dialog BOX ern s a desta a A a S 63 Circuit spe ma ge ccccccssccsseceseceseceseceeeeseeeseeeeeceeeneeeseeeseecsaeesaeeaecnseseseeeaeees 63 Brightness Contrast dialog DOX ccccsccsseceseceseceseceeceeeceeeeseeeesseeeseeeseeeteeesaes 64 Circuit spe with Region selected for ViCWING ccceccceecceeseesteeeteceteeeteenaeens 65 Circuit spe expanded to show Defined Region ccccescesseesteesteeeteeeteeeseens 65 Data Window Context Menu 00 cececeeceeesceseeseeeecesecaeeeeeesecaaeeeeeseceaeeaeeereaeeas 66 Normal Context menu 00 0 eeceeccescesceeseesecceeceesecaeeaeeecaeeaeeeeeeaecaeeeneeaeeneeenees 66 ROL Context Mens 0s s2scishveshevecastecsian e RE Aaaa a E e
248. secseeeseeeneeeeeennees 41 DG535 active MOE irinenn nieno aia 142 bracket pulsing snene nes 143 continuous exponential mode 142 continuous linear MOdC ceeceeeseeseeteeeeeeeeeees 142 Interactive Trigger Setup ceceeseeseeeeereees 147 0 01S 6211 0 00 ee 140 port address 00 eee eeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeensees 141 repetitive gating SCtUP ee eceeseeseeeeeeeeeteeeees 142 Sequential gating setup 0 00 ecceseceteeteeseeereeeees 142 slope threshold amp termination 0 ceee 141 trigger mode 0 eee eeeeseetceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeensees 141 Display color Control c cesceeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 81 Display tab page mose senescent cetsk eens 40 1 A DE o boas T EA T 40 E E EE EE EA E EAEE 40 Rotate deenen E et A i ESS 40 Displaying data as 3D graph 70 Division math operation cccceeeeseeeseeeteeneeeees 107 Documentation additional cccccccsseceereeeseeees 16 E F EBI poestestessecttestedestisheceispeties Bs ove heats Newt eosen oes 102 Edge Enhancement c ceeccessesseceseceteesseeseeenes 123 pro edure seiko RAE AER a 113 Edge Enhancement post processing Laplacian masks ccccseesseecceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 113 parameters oc ocdecceechecbieccern cesceossitseushoersiverterw aes 112 Sobel edge detection ceeseeseeseeeeeteeetees 113 Exclusive OR math operation cceeceeseesteeree 108 Exponential Data type
249. serseeseeserseeresresseseeseese 154 I E Ke E E E TE TT 154 Macro Record siccccc sccisccsscccescestescdeeccvestenciesteees 155 Virtual Chips cise Sevcecieee cco weds 156 OR math operation cccecceseeseeseeereeeeeeseeeereees 108 P Q Paper Size and Source ccceecceecceseeeteeeteeseeeneeenes 129 PCI card driver installation 0 cccccseeseeseeeeetees 22 PCI interface binning constraints 96 201 PCI Timer interface sissies erinnern 41 PentaMAX data collection cc ccccccccesccdicceiecsecesesdeesecesevancee 54 FOCUSA S iii beh 53 PG200 pulser sene ania atce 133 continuous exponential mode 135 continuous linear mode eeeeseeseeseeeteeeeeees 135 Operation Ofaa ok oie aes 133 repetitive gating setup ee ceeeeseeseeeteeteeeees 135 Sequential gating setup ceceseesteeteesseereeeees 135 PIHWDEBLINI c ccsessssossesssssessessersssenereseess 33 185 PI MAX Intensified CCD Camera eeeee 133 Pixels binning or grouping ccceceesseeseeeeeeeees 96 Post processing binning and skipping ceeeeseeseeseereeeeeees 126 CLOSS SOCHONS an ea o n a E 125 edge enhancement ceccesceesceeseesteeseeeseeenes 112 HiStOQrAM PE EE E EE 128 morphology ee iseni iie 116 sharpenihg sense aen eee hatch eit 114 SMOOTHING seier ann Me Ae RRS 115 threshold and clipping ceeceesseeseeeeeteeetees 124 Print PreVieWierinei iranin niian i a 130 P
250. sition of a given button on the Custom Toolbar Each time this button is clicked the selected button on the Toolbar buttons list moves up one position Move Down Together with Move Up Move Down determines the position of a given button on the Custom Toolbar Each time this button is clicked the selected button on the Toolbar buttons list moves down one position 152 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 16 Software Options Introduction The WinView 32 options described in this chapter can also be purchased from Princeton Instruments Contact Princeton Instruments Customer Support for order information Custom Chip WXCstChp opt Caution Introduction Hardware Setup T133 If this option has been installed selecting Show Custom Chip checkbox on the Controller Camera tab page adds the Custom Chip tab page to the dialog box The Custom Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Custom Chip Default CCD KDK 512x 768 Chip parameters are shown in Rows Parallel Shift Register Figure 148 The default values To Shift Columns conform to the physical layout doa of the CCD array and are eee oe li optimum for most Pre Dummies 4 a f a measurements Post Dummies 4 i Princeton Instruments does not F T Dummies 0 encourage users to change these parameter settings For most applications the default I Skip serial register clean settings
251. smic ray artifact correction Image Math covers WinView 32 s mathematical processing features Post Acquisition Processing Mask Operations discusses the several post acquisition mask process options provided including Edge enhancement Sharpening Smoothing and the Morphological Erode and Dilation operations Additional Post Acquisition Processing Options discusses the additional post acquisition processing options available including Threshold and Clipping Cross Sections Binning and Skipping and Histogram functions Printing describes printing features of WinView 32 WinView 32 can print directly to almost any Windows printer driver Pulser Operation describes the operation of the Pulsers that can be used with WinView 32 Custom Toolbar Settings describes the Custom Toolbar and explains how to add remove the available buttons Software Options describes WinView 32 options that can also be purchased from Princeton Instruments Introduction Part 3 Reference Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Online Help System and Camera Nomenclature provides a cross reference table for systems controllers and cameras CCD arrays It also provides brief descriptions of systems and system components CCD array related abbreviations are also included Data Structure contains descriptions of the data structure for both WinView WinSpec 1 43 and for 1 6 which is the same as for
252. sociated with Hardware Setup and Pulser Setup Other information such as software version and hardware serial numbers may be useful if you ever need to contact Customer Support System Component Your System Notes Application Software and Version WinView Version 2 5 Found on the installation CD or via the WinView Help menu Software Options Options purchased separately from WinView such as Macro Record or Virtual Chip PVCAM Driver Yes No PVCAM driver is used to run Photometrics cameras PhotonMax Princeton Instruments cameras with USB 2 and the Acton InSpectrum Interface Card Princeton Instruments PCI Tucson PCI USB 2 0 Many systems use the Princeton Instruments PCI Tucson PCI is required for Photometrics cameras and PhotonMax USB 2 is available for newer Princeton Instruments systems System Name Refer to your order and Appendix A Controller PentaMAX ST 121 ST 133 ST 133 2MHz ST 133 5MHz ST 138 Refer to your order and Appendix A Controller Serial Number Refer to the serial label Typically this is located on the bottom of the unit Detector Camera and CCD Array Refer to your order and Appendix A Detector Camera Serial Number Refer to the serial label Typically this is located on the back of the unit 20 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 System Component Your System Notes Shutter Ty
253. spe l 3 D Wink Data Filesi fy a ee Result tol kag Se a 1 Range Si ENE i a Ee to 128 PU Rang YR m ma rsa to 111 Datatype UINTI6 ame Foara Apply Close Help MiG a Apply Close Help Figure 100 Input tab page Figure 101 Output tab page Input tab page The Input tab page Figure 100 selects the data to be operated on You can specify the data file the frames within the file and the X and Y range on the CCD The input data type is reported Note that the Mouse button at the bottom of the window allows you to use the mouse to specify the region to be processed Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region The Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected Output tab page The Output tab page Figure 101 allows you to name the output file It additionally allows you to select whether the modified data is to be displayed and to select the data type The frame and X Y range are reported information only 111 112 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page Edge Enhancement x Edge enhancement is accomplished by mask operations defined by parameters entered on the Parameters tab page These functions can enhance Input Parameters Output edges sharpen or smooth features or erode or fe tet a a dilate an image
254. ss only part of the input images change the Frame X Range and Y Range values on the A tab page and also on the B tab page if two files are involved Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Enter the name of the output file on the C tab page If you want to restrict the output data range change the Frame X Range and Y Range values as appropriate Select the output file datatype If you want the output file to be displayed as soon as the processing is complete check the Display Result box Click on OK to begin processing or Cancel to cancel the operation 110 WinView 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 Chapter 11 Post Acquisition Mask Processes Introduction Several post acquisition mask processes including Edge Enhancement Sharpening Smoothing a Custom Filter and Morphological Erode and Dilation operations are provided in the WinView 32 software These processes all use the same Input and Output tab pages but have unique Parameters tab pages Since the Input and Output functionality is identical for all of these processes the Input and Output tab pages are described below The Parameters tab pages are described in the appropriate sections Edge Enhancement Edge Enhancement Input Parameters Output Input Parameters Output Tape mage Output Image Moond
255. ss you intend to expand the file for display again it is ordinarily better to actually close the file so that the RAM it is using will be freed for other use e Close in the File menu closes all windows using the data set displayed in the active data window This may be important if New in the Window menu or in the Data Window Context menu has been used to open additional windows with the same data Simply clicking on Close in the File menu will close all windows containing the same data regardless of how it is displayed e Close in the Control menu accessed by clicking on the WinView 32 icon at the left end of the Title bar closes WinView 32 as does double clicking on the WinView 32 icon Similarly the key combination ALT F4 also closes WinView 32 e Close All in the Window menu closes all open data files 60 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 e The key combination Ctrl F4 closes the active window only Deleting Data Files You can delete data files directly from within WinView 32 without having to close WinView 32 and without having to use the Windows 95 Explorer or another file utility This is achieved using the File Operations menu accessed by right clicking on the file name in the Open dialog box as explained below 1 Select Open from the File menu Only files with the selected data type spe or tif will be listed 2 Position the mouse cursor on the name of the file you want to delete and click the right mouse b
256. sure Time i Number of Images fi E CCD Readout Use FullChip Use Region Of Interest Readout Dimensions X 653 Y 492 r Accumulations Number fi r Amplifier High Capacity Low Noise r Avalanche Gain Gain 0 Enable Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Experiment Setup ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections m Exposure Time E sec nmn Number of Images fi m CCD Readout Use FullChip C Use Region Of Interest Readout Dimensions x 512 Y 512 r Accumulations Number fi 4 m Amplifier J High Papacy low Noise m Intensifier Gain ize 1 C Shutter Mode C Gate Mode B Enable Fast Pulse Option Safe Mode Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Figure 27 Experiment Setup Main tab page left all but PI MAX right PI MAX 2 On the Main tab page set the following parameters Exposure time 0 1 seconds For PI MAX system using PTG enter 0 sec Number of Images Use Full Chip selected Accumulations Gain PI MAX only 128 Amplifier if available High Capacity If this is a reported only parameter set it by selecting FAST on the ADC tab page Camera State PI MAX only Safe the photocathode is biased OFF 48 WARNING WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Avalanche Gain Cameras with electron multiplying CCDs
257. t was in column 10 you would have 9 lines of Os a 1 in the tenth row and Os in the remaining 1014 lines 5 When you have finished entering the Os and 1s save the file with a BLE extension Files with this extension are recognized by WinView as blemish files TIP If you have a long array use a spreadsheet that can save data to TXT files The numbered rows will help you keep track of where you are When you have finished with the data entry save the data to a text file TXT extension and then change the file extension to BLE Cosmic Ray Removal Causes highly localized spikes such as would be caused by cosmic rays interacting with the silicon of the CCD to be removed from the data after it is acquired but before it is stored Two different techniques in addition to OFF can be selected The Temporal technique compares a series of images and requires no user parameters The Spatial technique compares the data with the set threshold level If Spatial is selected the Sensitivity setting determines how large a data spike must be to be identified as a cosmic ray effect essentially the Sensitivity is a gain setting on the thresholding algorithm A value of 0 will find 0 cosmics while a setting of 100 will be most sensitive A setting of 50 will give good results in most situations Cosmic ray data is replaced by interpolated before and after data Chapter 10 Image Math Introduction A variety of mathematical operations can be p
258. tall e Ifthere are two camera systems connected to the host computer and turned on the wizard table should contain two listings e Ifthere are no systems listed click on Back check the cable connections and or turn on the camera system and then click on Next Camera Detection Wizard Detected Hardware EEV 100 1340F 100x1340 Figure 11 Camera Detection Wizard Detected Hardware dialog box 5 Follow the instructions on the dialog boxes to perform the initial hardware setup this wizard enters default parameters on the Hardware Setup dialog box tab pages and gives you an opportunity to acquire a test image to confirm the system is working Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 31 To Use the Manual Function Note This function can only be used to install Princeton Instruments PCI TAXI interface based systems both Princeton Instruments PCI TAXI and PVCAM supported systems can be installed by using the autodetection function previously described The manual function is very similar to the Hardware Detection Wizard but you are not given the opportunity to install a PVCAM based camera In addition unless you want to acquire the optional test image this function does not require that the system be turned on 1 Run WinView The Camera Detection Wizard will automatically run if this is the first time you have installed a Princeton Instruments WinX application WinView 32 WinSpec 32 or WinXTest 32 and a suppor
259. ted camera Otherwise if you installing a new camera type click on the Launch Camera Detection Wizard button on the Controller CCD tab page to start the wizard 2 On the Welcome dialog Figure 12 select the checkbox and click on Next This wizard will attempt to detect the camera system you are using Please make sure your system is connected to the computer and powered on before proceeding Back Cancel Help Figure 12 Camera Detection Wizard Welcome Manual selected dialog box 3 In most cases you will not be getting a New System Configuration Disk with your system Therefore the default selection is NO If you do have such a disk you would select YES and follow the directions for loading the information from that disk Click on NEXT and follow the directions on the subsequent dialog boxes for selecting the interface controller and detector camera 32 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Camera Detection Wizard Optional Configuration Disk Figure 13 Camera Detection Wizard Optional Configuration Disk dialog box When you have finished with these selections you will see the Test Image dialog box Figure 14 The default selection is No If you select Yes you must make sure that the system is connected to the host computer and that the camera system is turned ON before you click on the Next button Camera Detection Wizard Test Image Figure 14 Camera Detection Wizard T
260. tem Wide variety of CCD arrays Thermoelectric or cryogenic cooling available SPEC 10XP High performance spectroscopy system with XP lifetime vacuum This system can be thermoelectrically air cooled down to 80C and has software selectable six speed digitization up to 2 MHz SpectruMM Name used for some ST 133 based spectroscopy systems with an RTE head Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 167 TriVista Consists of three imaging corrected Acton Research spectrographs that can be used in single double and triple configurations May incorporate PMT detectors an or one or more Princeton Instruments CCD detectors VersArray High performance general purpose imaging system Wide variety of CCD arrays in imaging formats Thermoelectric or cryogenic cooling available VersArrayX High performance low light imaging system for astronomy MCP readout pressure sensitive paint PSP wind tunnel testing semiconductor failure analysis and streak tube readout applications Deep thermoelectric cooling air Controllers ST 121 Diode array controllers shipped with diode array detectors controlled by a PCI card ST 130 Obsolete controller but still supported in the WinView 32 software ST 133 Controller that can run the vast majority of Princeton Instruments brand cameras including MicroMAX PI MAX Spec 10 PI LCX PI MTE PI SCX PI SX OMA V and VersArray Different hardware types are needed to run different detecto
261. ternet Those customers who do not have access to the Internet may obtain the version upgrades on a CD ROM from our factory for an incidental shipping and handling charge See Item 12 in the following section of this warranty Your Responsibility for more information Warranty amp Service 205 Owner s Manual and Troubleshooting You should read the owner s manual thoroughly before operating this product In the unlikely event that you should encounter difficulty operating this product the owner s manual should be consulted before contacting the Princeton Instruments technical support staff or authorized service representative for assistance If you have consulted the owner s manual and the problem still persists please contact the Princeton Instruments technical support staff or our authorized service representative See Item 12 in the following section of this warranty Your Responsibility for more information Your Responsibility The above Limited Warranties are subject to the following terms and conditions l You must retain your bill of sale invoice and present it upon request for service and repairs or provide other proof of purchase satisfactory to Princeton Instruments You must notify the Princeton Instruments factory service center within 30 days after you have taken delivery of a product or part that you believe to be defective With the exception of customers who claim a technical issue with the operation
262. ters entered in the matrix These functions can enhance edges sharpen or smooth Filter Size features or erode or dilate an image 5x5 Fiter Sum 7 5 How these images are processed is briefly described below SORE A Close Help A mask is an n x n matrix n is 5 7 9 or 11 that is placed over every n x n Figure 111 Filter Matrix tab page subsection of the image Each parameter in the mask is multiplied by the corresponding value of the image The results are summed and placed in the central position in the output file Users can specify the Filter Size 5x5 7x7 9x9 or 11x11 The Filter Sum is displayed in the adjacent box The Load Defaults button sets the matrix parameters to their factory default values When you click on this button you will see a warning message Will erase Data for ALL Filter Sizes Continue with Yes No Yes will erase ALL filter data before loading the factory default values Custom Filter Procedure Use the following procedure to apply a custom filter to an image 1 Select Custom Filter from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of th
263. tfield RUE ERME correction Stop Acquisition 4 Select Acquire Flatfield from the Acquisition menu This Stef listeacre will immediately acquire a flatfield file using the Experiment Setup parameters Unlike background subtraction the shutter will open and close normally 5 Ifbackground subtraction was selected the background file will be subtracted from the flatfield file before it is saved to disk If the Acquire Flatfield feature is found to be too limiting in some way a flatfield file can be collected as a normal data file Once the file is collected enter the filename in the Flatfield Correction filename box on the Experiment Setup Data Corrections tab page see Figure 96 Automatic Flatfield Correction These steps instruct the software to automatically divide each new data file pixel by pixel by the specified flatfield file 1 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu or click on the E button on the Custom Toolbar This will open the Experiment Setup dialog box 2 Click on the Data Corrections tab to select the Data Corrections tab page Figure 96 3 Click on the Flatfield check box to turn on Flatfield correction Type in the name of a flatfield correction file in the current directory Alternatively click on the button at the end of the field to open the file browser to select the flatfield correction file if it is in a different directory 4 Once the Flatfield filename has been specified click on t
264. the Custom Toolbar ccccccscccssecssecssecsneceecesecesecsseeseeeseeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseneenaes 149 Customizing the Toolbar cccceccccsscessceeeeeeeeeecseecsaecsaecesecesecnseesseeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeesaes 149 Individual Dialog Item Descriptions cccccccseesseesseesseeeseesecseeseeeseeeeeseeeaeeeseeeseeesaeeaaes 150 Chapter 16 Software Options 000 cei ii iiniiiiniiiieeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeees 153 MMO CUCL ON s sn ceed a a dues cscdea ceases deat thus ea ene te EE a EEEE aud Ea REEE e EEE 153 Custom Chip WXCstChp 0pt c ccccccccccssesssesseeeseecseecseecsseceseceseenseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeesaes 153 Custom Timing WXCStTiIM opt cc ecccecseesseesseeseecseecssecesecesecnseeseeseeeseeeseseeeseeeseesaes 154 FITS CEILS 6X0 E EE E E 154 Macro Record WXMacrec Opt ccccccccecscesseessseeseecseecssecseecaeesecseeeseeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeseeeaaes 155 Virtual Chip WXVChIp Opt oo cececseeseesceessecssecssecsseceseceseceseesseesseeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeenaes 156 Part 3 REfCrencCe cccccccecececnececececececcenececeenceseenscsnees TOT Appendix A System and Camera Nomen clature cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeess 163 System Controller Type and Camera Type Cross Reference cccccsseeseesteesteeseees 163 System and System Component Descriptions ccccecccessceereeeceeeeeeeeeseeessecnseenseenseens 165 CCD Array Designators ccccccccccesecesscessceseceseceeeeeseecsaec
265. the first time WinView is executed At the end of the first operating session the settings in effect are written to SESSION DAT which is read the next time WinView software is operated so that the new session will begin with the same settings that were in effect at the end of the previous one WinView 32 and the Windows Registry WinView 32 doesn t need PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT because it automatically stores the settings in the registry at the end of each operating session However WinView 32 will read the WinView 16 PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT if they are copied to the directory containing the WinView 32 software This allows users who are upgrading from a 16 bit version of WinView to WinView 32 to transfer their previous operating settings to the new software However there is a constraint if there are settings in the registry i e WinView 32 has been operated at least once the software won t read PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT unless the file date is newer than the date of the stored registry settings This problem can be avoided by simply copying PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT to the WinView 32 directory before operating it the first time If that opportunity is lost anewer SESSION DAT can be created by booting the 16 bit WinView software and then exiting the program in the usual manner Similarly a text editor could be used to open edit a copy of PIHWDEF INI and then save it so that it has the current date 186 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5
266. the next highest integer to calculate that value For example 1000 frames 256 will result in 3 9 so enter 4 Note This value should be 1 for Focus mode Click on OK after you have finished entering the Environment settings Place a suitable target in front of the camera and click on Focus to verify that the camera is seeing the target Make any focusing gain or other adjustments necessary to fine tune the image Stop running in Focus mode 17 Now click on Acquire Experimental Timing Triggering can be achieved through the software via the Software Trigger timing mode selectable on the Experiment Setup dialog box Timing Mode tab page or it can be achieved via the Ext Syne input on the rear of the camera Triggering from the Ext Syne input allows you to acquire a single image per TTL pulse If Software Trigger has been selected back to back collection of the requested number of images will be initiated when Acquire is selected no further TTL trigger input is required Tips e If mechanical masking is used the mask can be a static one fixed dimensions in which case multiple masks should be made to accommodate a variety of imaging conditions Alternatively a more flexible mask can be manufactured by taking two thin metal sheets with a square hole the size of the exposed region of the CCD cut in the center For a 512 x 512 pixel CCD array with 15 micron pixels the exposed region would be 7 68 mm x 7 68 mm These m
267. through the initial selection of interface controller type and Detector Camera CCD type Once you have finished entering information through the wizard it exits to the Hardware Setup dialog box where you can make the remaining selections and review those made using the wizard The text that follows includes pictures of the dialog boxes you may see and background information about Non Volatile RAM NVRAM interface cards controllers and default selections Wherever possible the text follows the order in which the dialog boxes will appear Note This procedure assumes that for a PVCAM supported camera USB1 interface USB 2 0 interface PhotonMAX or Acton InSpectrum you have already run the RSConfig exe program see WinView Versions before 2 5 19 6 Run RSConfig exe page 24 34 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 1 Optional Disk In most cases you will not be getting a New System Configuration Disk with An Optional Disk May Be Sent With New Systeme your system Therefore the default Is a Disk Available Labeled selection is NO If you do have such a disk you would select YES and follow the directions for loading the YES No information from that disk Optional Configuration Disk New System Configuration Disk _bontinue Figure 16 Optional Configuration Disk dialog box 2 PVCAM Supported Camera Yes No Selection WinView 32 supports PVCAM x Princeton Instruments and Photometrics cameras as well a
268. ths after shipment If at anytime within twenty four 24 months from the date of delivery the detector should experience a sealed chamber failure all parts and labor needed to restore the chamber seal will be covered by us Open chamber products carry NO WARRANTY TO THE CCD IMAGING DEVICE EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Vacuum Integrity Limited 24 Month Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants the vacuum integrity of all our products for a period of up to twenty four 24 months from the date of shipment We warrant that the detector head will maintain the factory set operating temperature without the requirement for customer pumping Should the detector experience a Vacuum Integrity failure at anytime within twenty four 24 months from the date of delivery all parts and labor needed to restore the vacuum integrity will be covered by us Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Image Intensifier Detector Limited One Year Warranty All image intensifier products are inherently susceptible to Phosphor and or Photocathode burn physical damage when exposed to high intensity light Princeton Instruments warrants with the exception of image intensifier products that are found to have Phosphor and or Photocathode burn damage which carry NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED all image intensifier
269. to compensate for CCD array or camera orientation Before and after thumbnail illustrations show the effect of each selection If no option is selected the thumbnails will be the same Any orientation can be achieved with the proper combination of Rotate Reverse and Flip In the case of the ST 121 only Reverse is provided Rotate Rotates the image 90 counterclockwise Reverse Reverses the image horizontally Flip Flips the image vertically Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 41 Entering the Interface Communication Parameters The Interface tab page allows you to specify AETS O E the interface card installed in your computer Conaler XXX Display Intetace Cieans Skins and to enter the I O addresses if required This functionality is particularly useful if you eer al have multiple PCI cards installed in the host A computer Figure 23 shows all of the fields Intenupt Levet a and check boxes that exist on the Interface mae a tab page WinView 32 will display and hide features based on the interface card installed in the host computer All of the features are described in the text that follows 20 Address 2 1 0 Address 3 Type Select the communications type that will be used to transmit data from the controller to the computer All communications types are not available for all controllers and computers The Demo selection conch Hee which allows the software to be exercised but which does not support
270. ton menu or from the directory where you installed WinView When the RSConfig dialog box Figure 161 appears you can change the camera name to one that is more specific or you can keep the default name Cameral When you have finished click on the Done button RSConfig 2 6 x Names r Style Camera 1 Came Princeton Style USB2 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 161 RSConfig dialog box You should now be able to open WinView and from Setup Hardware run the Hardware Wizard When the PVCAM dialog box Figure 162 is displayed click in the Yes radio button click on Next and continue through the Wizard After the Wizard is finished the Controller Camera tab card will be displayed with the Use PVCAM checkbox selected You should now be able to set up experiments and acquire data Appendix F Troubleshooting 193 PVCAM x Are you using a PYCAM supported camera Yes C No coc e Figure 162 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog box Demo High Speed PCI and PCl Timer are Choices on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog Versions 2 5 19 0 and earlier If there is an installed Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card in the host computer and you want to operate a camera using the USB 2 0 interface the PVCAM INI file created by RSConfig exe must exist and the USB 2 0 supported camera must be Camera_1 PVCAM INI which contain
271. trips A single strip will always be plotted as a simple graph Note that from two to ten strips the intensity Y axis scale shifts position as required to read true for the selected strip The file Open dialog box and Display Layout dialog box both contain the three display mode select radio buttons Image Graph and 3D Graph If you want to control the data display mode yourself simply leave Auto Select unchecked and the display mode will correspond to whichever of the three radio buttons is selected Screen Refresh Rate The Screen Refresh Rate is an important but often overlooked display performance parameter At times such as when focusing by making the screen refresh rate as rapid as possible the focusing operation may be much easier to perform than it would be with a slow refresh rate To obtain the fastest possible refresh rate simply operate with the axes and cross sections both switched off View menu and with the Zoom factor set to 1 1 Note that the Zoom 1 1 button on the Data Window toolbar is only present when viewing an image To check the refresh rate click on the Status bar bottom of screen Collection Status pane which is immediately to the left of the Timer pane right end of Status bar The refresh rate will be displayed in the Collection Status pane Do not confuse the screen refresh rate with the data collection rate Data Displayed as an Image WinView 32 can display data as an image as a two dimensional graph
272. tton in the Interactive lt fcc cec Camera dialog box The camera will begin PIS 70 leeely Boeing x eames aad acquiring pictures at the fastest possible rate will OTo 64 Counts i C Decimation and the image will be displayed on the video y Se Se monitor Note that the image will not be displayed on the computer monitor while the i E 7 Interactive Camera dialog box is open BUN AINE 4 Focus the system optics and set the a PN r Interactive Camera dialog box Exposure Cancel Heb Time RS170 Scaling and Offset adjustments for the best viewed image In addition to the Exposure Time Intensity Figure 34 ST 133 Interactive Camera dialog box 52 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Scaling and Offset parameters the Pattern parameters determine which CCD pixels will be displayed on the video monitor Note that in Focus mode the images will not appear at the computer but only at the video monitor If the number of pixels on the CCD is very much larger than the number of video pixels you can use the Pan function to select any one of nine different subsets to display The Zoom function gives additional control One to one mapping from the selected region to the screen occurs with 2x selected You may additionally have the option of selecting Binning in which a wider view is achieved by combining adjacent pixels or Decimation in which pixels are discarded according to an algorithm The exposure tim
273. turn the product to Princeton Instruments International customers should contact their local Princeton Instruments representative distributor for repair information and assistance or visit our technical support page at www piacton com Normal Wear Item Disclaimer Princeton Instruments does not warrant certain items against defect due to normal wear and tear These items include internal and external shutters cables and connectors These items carry no warranty expressed or implied XP Vacuum Chamber Limited Lifetime Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants that the cooling performance of the system will meet our specifications over the lifetime of an XP detector or Princeton Instruments will at its sole option repair or replace any vacuum chamber components necessary to restore the cooling performance back to the original specifications at no cost to the original purchaser Any failure to cool to spec beyond our Basic 1 year limited warranty from date of shipment due to a non vacuum related component failure e g any components that are electrical electronic is NOT covered and carries NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty 203 204 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Sealed Chamber Integrity Limited 24 Month Warranty Princeton Instruments warrants the sealed chamber integrity of all our products for a period of twenty four 24 mon
274. u want to use hardware binning you define the binning parameters on the Experiment Setup ROI tab page These settings will be used for acquiring data until you change the ROI size or the amount of binning Note If you have a PCI card you may need to ensure that the number of pixels to be read out is always an even number a warning will appear if number of pixels needs to be changed If you are doing binning the number of pixels digitized after hardware binning is complete must be an even number Software Binning If blooming is an issue you can use software binning instead of hardware binning Software binning is activated by checking Use Software Binning on the ROI Setup tab page While software binning will prevent saturation of the CCD chip shift register pixels it is not as fast as hardware binning Chapter 8 ROI Definition amp Binning 97 Defining ROIs TIP You can acquire a full chip data set without losing your ROI definitions To do so simply click on the Use Full Chip radio button on the Experiment Setup Main tab page As long as Use Full Chip is selected the ROI setup parameters are ignored and data collection will result in full frame data sets To switch back to a defined ROI pattern click on the Use Region of Interest radio button on the Experiment Setup Main tab page Examples of Imaging ROIs Figure 90 Figure 93 show possible ROI patterns Note that the patterns in Figure 93 demonstrate varying size ROIs CCD
275. ual Version 2 5 Kinetics Kinetics is a special type of operation in which most of the CCD is mechanically or optically masked leaving a small section open to light This section is then read out very quickly See the System or Controller manual for more details on the CCD aspects of this readout mode DIF MicroMAX Interline only Dual Image Feature DIF is a special feature that allows images to be taken in pairs with very short exposure times as small as 1s This feature is only available for factory modified MicroMAX controller Interline camera systems Operating in this readout mode provides three timing modes unique to DIF systems IEC Internal Exposure Control EEC External Exposure Control and ESABI Electronic Shutter Active Between Images These modes are in addition to Free Run mode Vertical Shift Time This information appears for the Frame Transfer and Kinetics modes Reports the speed in microseconds at which a single row will be shifted vertically This information is based on the value in the Vertical Shift box The higher the value in that box the longer the vertical shift time Note If you are using a PVCAM supported camera the Vertical Shift rate is expressed in nsec row Use the up down arrows to change the Vertical Shift rate Vertical Shift Determines the speed of the image transfer from the exposed area of a frame transfer chip to the masked area Also sets the speed of image transfer when operating i
276. uired for each exposure equivalent to performing a zero second exposure with the shutter closed Without adding any light the bias allows charge to be read out on the CCD while raising the intensity level high enough to ensure that the camera does not deliver a negative number to the A D converter The A D converter only works in the set of positive numbers and has no instructions for processing negative numbers The bias may be user settable However it is set at the factory and should remain stable over the lifetime of the camera system Binning Hardware binning is the process of combining the charge from adjacent pixels in a CCD before the signal is read out by the preamplifier A binning of 1 in both directions reads out each pixel at full X axis resolution A binning of 2 in both directions combines four pixels cutting the X axis resolution in half but quadrupling the light collecting area If the CCD chip shift register is being saturated due to hardware binning you can use software binning instead by checking Use Software Binning on the ROI Setup tab page Note that software binning is not as fast as hardware binning Cancel button Exits a dialog box without performing any processing Any changes to the dialog are lost 201 202 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Close button Closes the dialog box or window with no action taken Dark current 1 The charge accumulated within a well in the absence of light 2 The backgrou
277. uous cleaning the current clean cycle must be completed before the exposure will begin In time critical experiments the number of rows per clean set on the Hardware Setup Controller Camera tab page should be 1 or 2 to minimize the delay 92 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Continuous Cleans Instruction If the controller and the camera support it a specialized cleaning function can be used when weler Gsiera Dina ineisce Cean Skes continuous cleans is active This function Continuous Cleans Instruction can only be activated if the checkbox for it is visible on the Hardware Setup Cleans Skips tab page see Cleans Number of Cleans 0 rs Figure 88 Number of Strips per Clearn 40 fer z X Clean Mode Continuous cleans instruction does horizontal CearPieExpoue d shifts while doing vertical shifts for a faster I Use Continuous Cleans Instuction continuous clean With this instruction the e d la b t E t 1 S t 3 d Vertical Skips J elay between an External Sync trigger an SS the start of exposure is minimized Number of Blocks 288 leat Continuous cleans instruction will be used in place of the standard continuous cleans if both Use Continuous Cleans Instruction on the Cleans Skips tab page and Continuous Cleans on the Experiment Setup Timing tab page are checked Figure 88 Cleans Skips tab page Continuous Cleans Instruction ROIs and Cleaning An ROI is a user defined subse
278. ur system manual before attempting data collection There are two data collection modes Focus and Acquire e In Focus mode operation no frames of data are stored however when Stop is selected the File Save function can be used to save the displayed data This mode is particularly convenient for familiarization and setting up For ease in focusing the screen refresh rate should be as rapid as possible achieved by operating with axes and cross sections off and with Zoom 1 1 selected e In Acquire mode every frame of data collected is stored This mode would ordinarily be selected during actual data collection One limitation of Acquire mode operation is that if data acquisition continues at too fast a rate for it to be stored data overflow will eventually occur This could only happen in Fast Mode operation The following data collection procedures are done in the Focus mode If using an intensified camera note that data collection in the following procedure will be done in the Shutter mode in which the camera can be damaged if exposed to light overload Before powering the controller and camera reduce the room light to reduce the risk of damage Note that intensifiers are particularly at risk in pulsed laser operation where overload spot damage can occur without raising the average current to where the overload detection circuits will be activated It is far better to be careful than sorry Before proceeding take the time to carefull
279. using a mouse or other graphical I O device although keyboard selection shortcuts are provided Mouse selection is typically done by positioning the mouse cursor on the selection item and clicking the left mouse button In some case clicking the right mouse button will bring up a dialog box with additional information or a special menu that allows additional operations to be performed Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the relationships between the saup Opions Window camera the controller and the host computer This overview is Hardware followed by a discussion of the Setup Wizard that runs the first Detector Temperature time you select Hardware from the Setup menu Figure 5 The eons remainder of the chapter presents the Hardware Setup tab pages so Pues you will be able to make the appropriate selections and entries for Supls ustom Toolbar your system Preferences The chapters that follow describe how to configure a pulser set up Lonirecion Dene oe experiment parameters and control array temperature Initial data ae x agnostics acquisition is discussed in Chapter 3 Figure 5 Setup menu Advanced functions such as Post Processing Custom Chip and Custom Timing are discussed in Part 2 of this manual Basic Hardware Overview The basic components of a Princeton Instruments system are a camera or detector a controller interconnecting cables a com
280. utton This will open the right click File operations Se Scan with Norton Antivirus pox Celle spe a Add tozin GB Add to Cell5b zip Send To i Filename a ut menu as shown in Figure 42 P Soak 3 Click on Delete Then answer oon n yes to the query asking whether Gajoe Delete you wish to send the file to the pe Leese recycling bin The file will be Properties deleted and the File Operations menu will close Figure 42 Right click File Operations menu Note Click on the Open dialog box Cancel button to exit the dialog box without deleting any files Multiple Files It is also possible to delete multiple files at the same time by using the Win95 Shift Click and Control Click selection features To select a range of contiguously listed files for deleting 1 Hold the Shift key down and click on the first file in the range The file will be selected 2 Then hold the Shift key down again and click on the last file in the range That file and all the files between the two designated files will be selected 3 To select multiple files which are not listed contiguously 4 Hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the first file That file will be selected 5 Then hold down the Ctrl key again and click on the second file That file will also be selected 6 Proceed in similar fashion to select each file to be deleted Once all files to be deleted have been selected right click on a
281. ved3 3808 reserved BYTE new_calib_flag 3809 If set to 200 valid label below char calib_label 81 3810 Calibration label NULL term d char expansion 87 3891 Calibration Expansion area End of Calibration Structures 3978 4098 char Istring 40 3978 special intensity scaling string char Spare_6 25 4018 BYTE SpecType 4043 spectrometer type acton spex etc BYTE SpecModel 4044 spectrometer model type dependent BYTE PulseBurstUsed 4045 pulser burst mode on off DWORD PulseBurstCount 4046 pulser triggers per burst double PulseBurstPeriod 4050 pulser burst period in usec BYTE PulseBracketUsed 4058 pulser bracket pulsing on off BYTE PulseBracketType 4059 pulser bracket pulsing type double PulseTimeConstFast 4060 pulser slow exponential time constant in usec double PulseAmplitudeFast 4068 pulser fast exponential amplitude constant double PulseTimeConstSlow 4076 pulser slow exponential time constant in usec double PulseAmplitudeSlow 4084 pulser slow exponential amplitude constant short AnalogGain 4092 analog gain short AvGainUsed 4094 avalanche gain was used short AvGain 4096 avalanche gain value short lastvalue 4098 Always the LAST value in the header Start of Data 4100 4100 Start of Data 28 88 K k k k k k K k k k k K kK k k k K K K k k K 2K 2K 2K 2K ok End of File k K k k k k K K k k k k K k k k k fe K 3K 2 2 2K 2K 2K k Definition of Array Sizes HDRNAMEMAX 120 Max c
282. ving the data to an ASCII file The ASCII Output Setup dialog box Figure 82 allows you to specify the delimiter and the line termination character to be used when the data is stored in ASCII format The choice of delimiter and termination character depends on the requirements of the program into which you will be importing the data When storing the file WinSpec uses the filename and location parameters entered on the Experiment Setup Data File tab page Chapter 6 On Line Data Acquisition Processes 87 Parameters Delimiter Select one of the following as the Experiment Setup delimiter to be used Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections ADC Timing Processes Save Load Comma r 1 Space T On Line Thresholding Setup Semicolon Tab Line Termination Characters Select one of the following as the line termination character to be used A Vv ul ile up Line Feed Carriage Return Een ae ee he Carriage Return Line Feed Carriage Return Only Line Feed Only Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 82 ASCII Output Setup dialog box Procedure 1 Select the Experiment Setup Data File tab page 2 Enter the filename to be used when WinSpec saves the TXT file Click on the browse button to the right of the Name field and select the directory where the file should be saved You can also select other file saving parameters such as auto increment file overwrite or file append 3 Select ASCII Output F
283. wable range a warning message Figure 142 will be displayed Clicking Yes will cause the parameter in question to be set to the limit value Clicking No will cause the parameter setting to be retained but the actual value will still be the applicable minimum or maximum If the box isn t checked the applicable minimum or maximum will be established automatically i The Starting Pulse Delay OF 1 Is Less Than The Minimum Of 1 5625 Do You Want To Reset This Value To The Minimumi Yes No Figure 142 Range Limits Exceeded Warning Fixed Increment Type With this selection the increment or change in Gate Width and Gate Delay is the same from shot to shot The actual increments depend on the specified starting and ending values and on the Number of Images The increment values are calculated and reported in the associated fields Exponential Increment Type With this selection the increment or change in Gate Width and Gate Delay changes from shot to shot The precise delay and width of each shot with respect to To is determined by the values entered for the Fast Decay and Slow Decay Time Constant and Amplitude parameters In fluorescent decay experiments for example there will typically be two species contributing to the output data one of which decays much faster than the other For example there might be a fast fluorophor with a decay time of at most a few nanoseconds and a slower one with a decay time of perhaps a hundred nan
284. which the operation is to be performed If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Load the LUT LUT files must be of the type TXT The file name can be entered directly or selected by using the browser clicking on the button at the end of the field opens the browser Click on the Create Binary LUT button to convert the text LUT to binary Click on Apply to begin convert the input data values to the output values specified per the LUT 120 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Look Up Table Formats The contents of a look up table text file are entered using an ASCII text editor and the file is saved with a TXT extension The format used within the file depends on the type of remapping one to one remapping of intensity levels or a user defined selection of input to output values Format 1 This format is for a one to one mapping of intensity levels Imin and Imax the minimum and maximum input levels inclusive are supplied in the first line with a comma delimiter The subsequent values are supplied one output value per line The mapping assumes that all of the input intensities in the specified range are represented by an output value Therefore the number of output values in the text file must cover the range Umax Imin 1 Input levels
285. will give the best results We strongly advise contacting the factory for guidance before customizing the chip definition oK Cancel Help Figure 148 Custom Chip tab page Normally not all of the pixels in a CCD array are exposed and read out a frame of dummy pixels bounds the active area These dummy pixels are usually masked and are not normally read out However they could be read out by changing the chip definition in software For example in the case of the KDK 512 x 768 chip illustrated in Figure 148 the 512 active rows are preceded by four dummy rows and followed by four dummy rows In addition there are 14 dummy columns on one side of the active region and 14 dummy columns on the other side By changing the chip definition to increase the active area while decreasing the dummy settings the dummy cells would be read out By doing so one could measure the dark charge with every readout Note that F T Dummies are chip specific and are dummy rows at the boundary of the masked and visible areas of a frame transfer device 153 154 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 It is also possible to increase image acquisition speed by reducing the size of the active area in the definition The result will be faster but lower resolution data acquisition Operating in this mode would ordinarily require that the chip be masked so that only the reduced active area is exposed This will prevent unwanted charge from spilling into the act
286. without having first turned on the ST 133 They will also be deactivated if you have installed a camera being run under USB 2 0 and a Princeton Instruments RSPI high speed PCI card was also detected when RSConfig exe was run 1 Check to see if the ST 133 is connected to the host computer and is turned on If it is not connected or is connected but not turned on go to Step 2 If it is connected and on go to Step 3 2 Close WinView verify that the ST 133 is connected to the host computer turn on the ST 133 and reopen WinView The formerly grayed out functions should now be available 3 Ifthe ST 133 is connected and on the USB 2 0 camera may not be listed as Camera 1 in the PVCAM INI file 4 Run RSConfig exe accessible from the Windows Start Programs PI Acton menu If the USB 2 0 camera is listed as Camera 2 Princeton Style USB2 in Figure 166 you will have to edit the PVCAM INI file RSConfig 2 6 x Names r Style Camera 1 Camerat Princeton Style Camera 2 Cameraz Princeton Style USB2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 166 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles 5 Using Notepad or a similar text editor open PVCAM INI which is located in the Windows directory C WINNT for example If the contents of the file look like Change the headings so the contents now look like Camera_1 Camera 2 Type 1 Name Cameral
287. xperiment Setup procedure steps common to all controller types 47 PentaMAX Penre San EA 53 procedure for all controllers cecesseesseeteeees 54 Skips and Cleans cccesceseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 47 SL e E EE E EA 51 temperature control sssesessssessseserseeseesesseeeesee 46 Data correction techniques ccsccesceseesteeseeeees 101 Data display types cccccecsseescesseeseeeteceseeseeeneeeneeses 61 Data displayed as 3D graph ssesseseeseeeesseserseeees see 70 Data displayed as graph 5 95 display range se essseessseserseesersersrsesssee 73 brightness contrast control sessseseseeseeeesseeeesee 64 context WINKOW s sssssesessesseeeessesersresersessreressesees 66 CULSOL e eiie ieo ei E E E 75 CursOr CUVE inisee asics noreo iien e 77 CULSOL FUNCTIONS nen 75 displaying one Strip ecceeceeseeesceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 75 hidden surfaces ccccccesceesesseceseeeteesteeseeeneeenes 78 Information DOX cccceseeseceteeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeensees 74 Marker Curve naen cocssvsauescun tt lech tieteine sesiens 77 multiple Strips cececeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeseenees 76 ROD eea in iee ee eae ee 73 strip sel ctionr uneso e 76 Undo All Zoom In sseeseseseesereesseesessrsressesersessee 74 IA AIA D l a LAERET A ET 73 Data displayed as image autoranging ROL sesseeseseesseeesssrsersresrrsessreeessesees 80 axes and Cross Sections s sessessesseserseeseeeess
288. y read the manual for your intensified camera Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for shutter mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual 45 46 WinView 32 Manual Version 2 5 Temperature Control Before continuing the array temperature should be set to some easily achieved value in the operating range and Temperature lock should be established The way this is done depends on the controller Temperature Control for a System using an ST 133 Controller or for a PVCAM based System 1 Detector Temperature Open the WinView 32 Setup menu and click on Detector Temperature This will cause Target Temperature 0 0 the Temperature dialog box to appear as x Current Temperature Locked shown in Figure 26 Sze Temp Set the Target Temperature to the desired a Tra Help value 0 suggested for initial data acquisition Figure 26 Temperature dialog box Click on the Set Temp button When the Current Temperature Unlocked message changes to Current Temperature Locked temperature lock will have been established Notes 1 The ST 133 additionally has a Temp Lock LED on the Analog Control module at the rear of the controller that visually indicates when temperature lock occurs 2 Ifyou are using the USB 2 0 interface or are have a PVCAM based system

WinView/32 Software User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents